ld: Pass -z notext to linker for tests with DT_TEXTREL
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b3adc24a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
fa1477dc 34@set PDP11
2a60a7a8
AM
35@set POWERPC
36@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 37@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 38@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
39@set SPU
40@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 41@set WIN32
e0001a05 42@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
43@end ifset
44@c man end
45
9160ea82
AM
46@ifnottex
47@dircategory Software development
48@direntry
252b5132 49* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
50@end direntry
51@end ifnottex
252b5132 52
0e9517a9 53@copying
e49e529d
JM
54This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57@end ifset
58version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 59
b3adc24a 60Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 61
cf055d54 62Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 63under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
64or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 67section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 68@end copying
252b5132
RH
69@iftex
70@finalout
71@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 72@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 73@titlepage
71ba23f6 74@title The GNU linker
252b5132 75@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
76@subtitle @code{ld}
77@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79@end ifset
252b5132
RH
80@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81@author Steve Chamberlain
82@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
83@page
84
85@tex
86{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
87\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 89\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
90\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91}
92\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93@end tex
94
95@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 96@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b3adc24a 97Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 138@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
139@ifset ARM
140* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
142@ifset M68HC11
143* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
148@ifset M68K
149* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150@end ifset
833794fc
MR
151@ifset MIPS
152* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
160@ifset S/390
161* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
163@ifset SPU
164* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
166@ifset TICOFF
167* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
169@ifset WIN32
170* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
172@ifset XTENSA
173* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174@end ifset
252b5132
RH
175@end ifclear
176@ifclear SingleFormat
177* BFD:: BFD
178@end ifclear
179@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 183* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 184* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 185@end menu
84ec0e6d 186@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
187
188@node Overview
189@chapter Overview
190
191@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 193
0879a67a 194@ifset man
0285c67d 195@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 196ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
197@c man end
198
199@c man begin SEEALSO
200ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202@file{ld}.
203@c man end
204@end ifset
205
206@c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 209their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 210compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 211
ff5dcc92 212@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
213a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
0285c67d
NC
216@ifset man
217@c For the man only
ece2d90e 218This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
219@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
221@end ifset
222
252b5132 223@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
224This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
226write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229@end ifclear
230
231Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 234@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
235(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man end
238
252b5132
RH
239@node Invocation
240@chapter Invocation
241
0285c67d
NC
242@c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
ff5dcc92 244The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
245and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
0285c67d
NC
248@c man end
249
252b5132
RH
250@ifset UsesEnvVars
251@menu
a05a5b64 252* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
253* Environment:: Environment Variables
254@end menu
255
256@node Options
a05a5b64 257@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
258@end ifset
259
260@cindex command line
261@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
262
263@c man begin OPTIONS
264
252b5132
RH
265The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 268For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
269object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272@smallexample
273ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274@end smallexample
275
ff5dcc92 276This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
277result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
ff5dcc92 281Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
282point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
287occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289noted in the descriptions below.
290
291@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
292Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
296
297Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301message @samp{No input files}.
302
36f63dca 303If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
304assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
309@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
314
315For options whose names are a single letter,
316option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318option that requires them.
319
320For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 321precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 322@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 323this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 324only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
325@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327output.
328
329Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334accepted.
252b5132 335
36f63dca 336Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 337(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
338prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
340
341@smallexample
2509a395 342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
343@end smallexample
344
345This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
346silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353@smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355@end smallexample
4e53152f 356
a05a5b64 357Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
358linker:
359
ff5dcc92 360@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 361@include at-file.texi
dff70155 362
2509a395
SL
363@kindex -a @var{keyword}
364@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
365This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
7ee314fa
AM
371@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 378it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 379This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 380interface.
7ee314fa 381
252b5132
RH
382@ifclear SingleFormat
383@cindex binary input format
384@kindex -b @var{format}
385@kindex --format=@var{format}
386@cindex input format
387@cindex input format
388@item -b @var{input-format}
389@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
390@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 392@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 393that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 394configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 395to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
396default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400@xref{BFD}.
401
402You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404linking object files of different formats), by including
405@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 406particular format.
252b5132
RH
407
408The default format is taken from the environment variable
409@code{GNUTARGET}.
410@ifset UsesEnvVars
411@xref{Environment}.
412@end ifset
413You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
414@code{TARGET};
415@ifclear man
416see @ref{Format Commands}.
417@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
418@end ifclear
419
420@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422@cindex compatibility, MRI
423@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 425For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 426files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
427@ifclear man
428@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429@end ifclear
430@ifset man
431the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432@end ifset
433Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 434the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
435scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
437specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439@cindex common allocation
440@kindex -d
441@kindex -dc
442@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 443@item -d
252b5132
RH
444@itemx -dc
445@itemx -dp
446These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
7ee314fa
AM
452@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 461The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 462
abf874aa
CL
463@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473@smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492@end smallexample
493
494This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499This option enables warnings when
500@code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503output region.
504
252b5132
RH
505@cindex entry point, from command line
506@kindex -e @var{entry}
507@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 508@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
509@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
b58f81ae
DJ
518@kindex --exclude-libs
519@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 521exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
522@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527be treated as hidden.
528
e1c37eb5
DK
529@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540regardless of this option.
541
252b5132
RH
542@cindex dynamic symbol table
543@kindex -E
544@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 545@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
546@item -E
547@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
548@itemx --no-export-dynamic
549When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
558
559If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562linking the program itself.
563
55255dae 564You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 565be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 566See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 567
8b747e1a
DK
568Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
36f63dca 572@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
573@cindex big-endian objects
574@cindex endianness
575@kindex -EB
576@item -EB
577Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
578
579@cindex little-endian objects
580@kindex -EL
581@item -EL
582Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 583@end ifclear
252b5132 584
2509a395
SL
585@kindex -f @var{name}
586@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
587@item -f @var{name}
588@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
589When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
590to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
591table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
592symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593
594If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
595run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
596the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
597first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
598@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
599in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
600Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
601implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 602machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
603
604This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
605will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
606
2509a395
SL
607@kindex -F @var{name}
608@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 609@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 610@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
611When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
612the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
613of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
614on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
615
616If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
617run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
618dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
619filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
620found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
621used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
622@var{name}.
623
ff5dcc92 624Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 625toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
626object files.
627@ifclear SingleFormat
628The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 629@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 630@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
631environment variable.
632@end ifclear
633The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
634creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 635
3dbf70a2 636@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
637@kindex -fini=@var{name}
638@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
639When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
640executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
641address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
642the function to call.
643
252b5132
RH
644@kindex -g
645@item -g
646Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
647
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -G @var{value}
649@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 650@cindex object size
2509a395 651@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
652@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
653Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
654@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 655MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
656sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
657
658@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 659@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 660@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 661@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
662@itemx -soname=@var{name}
663When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
664the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
665which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
666linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
667field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
668
669@kindex -i
670@cindex incremental link
671@item -i
672Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
673
3dbf70a2 674@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
675@kindex -init=@var{name}
676@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
677When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
678executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
679of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
680function to call.
681
252b5132 682@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 683@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 684@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 685@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
686@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
687Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
688list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
689If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 690will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 691will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 692
ff5dcc92 693On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
694files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
695and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
696called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
697@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
698indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
699to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
700@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
701
702The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
703specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
704was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
705command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
706archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
707the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
708
ff5dcc92 709See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
710archives multiple times.
711
712You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
713
714@ifset GENERIC
715This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 716if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
717behaviour of the AIX linker.
718@end ifset
719
720@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 721@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 722@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 723@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 724@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
725Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
726for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
727option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
728in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
729on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 730@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
731order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
732how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
733option is specified.
252b5132 734
3aa2d05a
NC
735If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
736prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
737@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 738
252b5132
RH
739@ifset UsesEnvVars
740The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 741@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
742some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
743@end ifset
744
745The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
746@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
747at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
748
749@cindex emulation
750@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 751@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
752Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
753emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
754
755If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
756@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
757
758Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
759configured.
760
761@cindex link map
762@kindex -M
763@kindex --print-map
764@item -M
765@itemx --print-map
766Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
767information about the link, including the following:
768
769@itemize @bullet
770@item
3b83e13a 771Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
772@item
773How common symbols are allocated.
774@item
775All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
776which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
777@item
778The values assigned to symbols.
779
780Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
781involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
782have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
783linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
784of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
785the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
786linker script containing:
787
788@smallexample
789 foo = 1
790 foo = foo * 4
791 foo = foo + 8
792@end smallexample
793
794will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
795option is used:
796
797@smallexample
798 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
800 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
801@end smallexample
802
803See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
804scripts.
d2ef37eb 805
06ddcada
AM
806@item
807How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 808
06ddcada
AM
809When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
810.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
811These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
812
813@smallexample
814Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
815@end smallexample
816
06ddcada 817This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
818merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
819is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
820
821@smallexample
06ddcada 822Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
823@end smallexample
824
06ddcada 825This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
826when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
827is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
828@end itemize
829
035801ce
FS
830@cindex link map discarded
831@kindex --print-map-discarded
832@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
833@item --print-map-discarded
834@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
835Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
836in the link map. Enabled by default.
837
252b5132
RH
838@kindex -n
839@cindex read-only text
840@cindex NMAGIC
841@kindex --nmagic
842@item -n
843@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
844Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
845libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
846mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
847
848@kindex -N
849@kindex --omagic
850@cindex read/write from cmd line
851@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 852@item -N
252b5132
RH
853@itemx --omagic
854Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
855not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
856libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
857mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
858is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
859specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
860
861@kindex --no-omagic
862@cindex OMAGIC
863@item --no-omagic
864This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
865sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
866be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
867shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
868
869@kindex -o @var{output}
870@kindex --output=@var{output}
871@cindex naming the output file
872@item -o @var{output}
873@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 874Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
875option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
876script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
877
878@kindex -O @var{level}
879@cindex generating optimized output
880@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 881If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 882the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
883should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
884option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
885the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
886no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
887of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 888
387dd777
DP
889@kindex -plugin @var{name}
890@item -plugin @var{name}
891Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
892the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
893automatically added by the complier, when using link time
894optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
895wish.
896
897Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
898from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
899@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
900those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 901copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 902based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 903just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 904
26278bb8
UD
905@kindex --push-state
906@cindex push state governing input file handling
907@item --push-state
908The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
909flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
910restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
911
912The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
913@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
914@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
915@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
916@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
917@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
918
919One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
920used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
921listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
922something as follows:
923
924@smallexample
925-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
926@end smallexample
927
928@kindex --pop-state
929@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 930@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
931Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
932flags governing input file handling.
933
a712da20
NC
934@kindex -q
935@kindex --emit-relocs
936@cindex retain relocations in final executable
937@item -q
938@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 939Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
940Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
941order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
942in larger executables.
943
dbab7a7b
NC
944This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
945
4f471f39
RS
946@kindex --force-dynamic
947@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
948@item --force-dynamic
949Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
950to VxWorks targets.
951
252b5132
RH
952@cindex partial link
953@cindex relocatable output
954@kindex -r
1049f94e 955@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 956@item -r
1049f94e 957@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 958Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 959turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
960linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
961magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
962@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 963@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
964If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
965linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
966constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
967
62bf86b4
HPN
968When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
969partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
970relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
971example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
972with input files in other formats at all.
973
252b5132
RH
974This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
975
976@kindex -R @var{file}
977@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
978@cindex symbol-only input
979@item -R @var{filename}
980@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
981Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
982relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
983to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
984programs. You may use this option more than once.
985
ff5dcc92 986For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 987followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 988the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
989
990@kindex -s
991@kindex --strip-all
992@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 993@item -s
252b5132
RH
994@itemx --strip-all
995Omit all symbol information from the output file.
996
997@kindex -S
998@kindex --strip-debug
999@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 1000@item -S
252b5132
RH
1001@itemx --strip-debug
1002Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1003
a70f34c0
NC
1004@kindex --strip-discarded
1005@kindex --no-strip-discarded
1006@item --strip-discarded
1007@itemx --no-strip-discarded
1008Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1009Enabled by default.
1010
252b5132
RH
1011@kindex -t
1012@kindex --trace
1013@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 1014@item -t
252b5132 1015@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
1016Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1017@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1018@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1019and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1020a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
1021
1022@kindex -T @var{script}
1023@kindex --script=@var{script}
1024@cindex script files
1025@item -T @var{scriptfile}
1026@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1027Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 1028@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 1029@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
1030output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1031the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1032specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1033options accumulate.
252b5132 1034
14be8564
L
1035@kindex -dT @var{script}
1036@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1037@cindex script files
1038@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1039@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1040Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1041
1042This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1043processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1044command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1045@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1046behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1047command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1048the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1049@samp{gcc}).
1050
252b5132
RH
1051@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1052@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1053@cindex undefined symbol
1054@item -u @var{symbol}
1055@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1056Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1057symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1058modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1059different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1060option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1061
0a618243
AB
1062If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1063into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1064undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1065instead.
1066
1067@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1068@cindex symbols, require defined
1069@cindex defined symbol
1070@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1071Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1072is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1073is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1074and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1075@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1076can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1077
252b5132
RH
1078@kindex -Ur
1079@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1080@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1081For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1082@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1083turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1084@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1085It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1086with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1087be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1088@samp{-r} for the others.
1089
c005eb9e
AB
1090@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1091@cindex orphan sections
1092@cindex sections, orphan
1093@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1094Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1095specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1096
1097@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1098
1099@table @code
1100@item place
1101Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1102the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1103@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1104
1105@item discard
1106All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1107@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1108
1109@item warn
1110The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1111issue a warning.
1112
1113@item error
1114The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1115@end table
1116
1117The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1118
577a0623
AM
1119@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1121Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1122@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1123missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1124specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1125multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1126input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1127in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1128
252b5132
RH
1129@kindex -v
1130@kindex -V
1131@kindex --version
1132@cindex version
1133@item -v
1134@itemx --version
1135@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1136Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1137lists the supported emulations.
1138
1139@kindex -x
1140@kindex --discard-all
1141@cindex deleting local symbols
1142@item -x
1143@itemx --discard-all
1144Delete all local symbols.
1145
1146@kindex -X
1147@kindex --discard-locals
1148@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1149@item -X
252b5132 1150@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1151Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1152system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1153or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1154
1155@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1156@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1157@cindex symbol tracing
1158@item -y @var{symbol}
1159@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1160Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1161option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1162to prepend an underscore.
1163
1164This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1165don't know where the reference is coming from.
1166
1167@kindex -Y @var{path}
1168@item -Y @var{path}
1169Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1170for Solaris compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1173@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1174The recognized keywords are:
1175@table @samp
1176
e6e2dfbd
AM
1177@item bndplt
1178Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1179
1180@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1181@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1182@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1183@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1184Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1185to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1186@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1187@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1188@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1189@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1190Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1191
233a0083
L
1192@item cet-report=none
1193@itemx cet-report=warning
1194@itemx cet-report=error
1195Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1196GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1197section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1198linker not report missing properties in input files.
1199@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1200missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1201the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1202Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1203GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1204turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1205Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1206
cd6d6c15 1207@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1208@itemx nocombreloc
1209Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1210dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1211
b8871f35 1212@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1213@itemx nocommon
1214Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1215link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1216
1217@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1218Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1219layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1220using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1221
cd6d6c15 1222@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1223Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1224is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1225This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1226
e6e2dfbd
AM
1227@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1228@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1229Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1230if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1231by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1232@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1233may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1234selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1235these options.
1236
6aa29e7b
JJ
1237@item execstack
1238Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1239
b039ef04
L
1240@item global
1241This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1242the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1243of subsequently loaded libraries.
1244
93ab9c0d
NC
1245@item globalaudit
1246This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1247This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1248setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1249tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1250the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1251all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1252
e6e2dfbd
AM
1253@item ibtplt
1254Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1255Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1256
8df93cb5 1257@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1258Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1259to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1260Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1261
cd6d6c15
NC
1262@item initfirst
1263This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1264It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1265before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1266the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1267the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1268objects.
1269
1270@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1271Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1272so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1273libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1274
5fa222e4
AM
1275@item lazy
1276When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1277dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1278the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1279Lazy binding is the default.
1280
cd6d6c15 1281@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1282Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1283
e6e2dfbd
AM
1284@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1285Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1286
e6e2dfbd
AM
1287@item muldefs
1288Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1289
cd6d6c15 1290@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1291Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1292defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1293
1294@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1295Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1296should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1297
1298@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1299Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1300
1301@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1302Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1303
1304@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1305Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1306
6aa29e7b
JJ
1307@item noexecstack
1308Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1309
e6e2dfbd
AM
1310@item noextern-protected-data
1311Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1312library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1313used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1314generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1315module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1316i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1317
e6e2dfbd
AM
1318@item noreloc-overflow
1319Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1320relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1321overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1322
cd6d6c15
NC
1323@item now
1324When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1325dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1326when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1327function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1328called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1329
1330@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1331Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1332
6aa29e7b 1333@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1334@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1335Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1336specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1337relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1338than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1339Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1340
47acac12
L
1341@item separate-code
1342@itemx noseparate-code
1343Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1344specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1345be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1346code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1347
e6e2dfbd
AM
1348@item shstk
1349Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1350to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1351Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1352
04c3a755 1353@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1354Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1355Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1356@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1357
e6e2dfbd
AM
1358@item text
1359@itemx notext
1360@itemx textoff
1361Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1362relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1363@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1364
97a232d7
NC
1365@item undefs
1366Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1367either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1368This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1369
cd6d6c15
NC
1370@end table
1371
ece2d90e 1372Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1373
1374@kindex -(
1375@cindex groups of archives
1376@item -( @var{archives} -)
1377@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1378The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1379either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1380
1381The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1382references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1383the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1384archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1385object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1386would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1387they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1388resolved.
1389
1390Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1391it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1392more archives.
1393
69da35b5
NC
1394@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1395@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1396@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1397@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1398Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1399recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1400and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1401the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1402behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1403so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1404restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1405
4a43e768
AM
1406@kindex --as-needed
1407@kindex --no-as-needed
1408@item --as-needed
1409@itemx --no-as-needed
1410This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1411on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1412the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1413on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1414needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1415emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1416non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1417the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1418non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1419Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1420the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1421needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1422from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1423
e56f61be
L
1424@kindex --add-needed
1425@kindex --no-add-needed
1426@item --add-needed
1427@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1428These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1429their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1430options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1431and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1432
252b5132
RH
1433@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1434@item -assert @var{keyword}
1435This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1436
1437@kindex -Bdynamic
1438@kindex -dy
1439@kindex -call_shared
1440@item -Bdynamic
1441@itemx -dy
1442@itemx -call_shared
1443Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1444for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1445default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1446for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1447multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1448@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1449
a1ab1d2a
UD
1450@kindex -Bgroup
1451@item -Bgroup
1452Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1453section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1454object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1455@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1456only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1457
252b5132
RH
1458@kindex -Bstatic
1459@kindex -dn
1460@kindex -non_shared
1461@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1462@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1463@itemx -dn
1464@itemx -non_shared
1465@itemx -static
1466Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1467platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1468variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1469may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1470library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1471option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1472option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1473shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1474references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1475libraries.
252b5132
RH
1476
1477@kindex -Bsymbolic
1478@item -Bsymbolic
1479When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1480definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1481for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1482within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1483platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1484
40b36307
L
1485@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1486@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1487When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1488symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1489This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1490libraries.
40b36307 1491
55255dae
L
1492@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1494Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1495typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1496global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1497within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1498to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1499in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1500which support shared libraries.
1501
1502The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1503scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1504
40b36307
L
1505@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1506@item --dynamic-list-data
1507Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1508
1509@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1511Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1512is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1513
0b8a70d9
L
1514@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1516Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1517
252b5132
RH
1518@kindex --check-sections
1519@kindex --no-check-sections
1520@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1521@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1522Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1523been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1524perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1525suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1526allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1527restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1528Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1529force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1530option.
252b5132 1531
ddbb8a31
NC
1532@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1533@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1534@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1535@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1536This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1537by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1538command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1539output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1540input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1541specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1542follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1543behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1544
1545This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1546libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1547mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1548their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1549required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1550the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1551dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1552symbols.
1553
252b5132
RH
1554@cindex cross reference table
1555@kindex --cref
1556@item --cref
1557Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1558generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1559Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1560
1561The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1562easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1563sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1564symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1565definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1566where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1567symbol are listed.
252b5132 1568
4818e05f
AM
1569@cindex common allocation
1570@kindex --no-define-common
1571@item --no-define-common
1572This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1573The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1574@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1575
1576The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1577the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1578of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1579forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1580Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1581from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1582This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1583and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1584duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1585paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1586
7bdf4127
AB
1587@cindex group allocation in linker script
1588@cindex section groups
1589@cindex COMDAT
1590@kindex --force-group-allocation
1591@item --force-group-allocation
1592This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1593normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1594default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1595change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1596command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1597effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1598
252b5132 1599@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1600@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1601@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1602Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1603address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1604times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1605limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1606context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1607symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1608constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1609using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1610@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1611equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1612
1613@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1614@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1615@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1616@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1617@itemx --no-demangle
1618These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1619and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1620present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1621underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1622mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1623different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1624to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1625demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1626is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1627
1628@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1629@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1630@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1631@item -I@var{file}
1632@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1633Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1634generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1635linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1636doing.
1637
9b8b325a
RF
1638@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1639@item --no-dynamic-linker
1640When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1641linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1642executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1643entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1644
a70f34c0
NC
1645@kindex --embedded-relocs
1646@item --embedded-relocs
1647This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1648that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1649is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1650targets.
1651
3f0a5f17
ME
1652@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1654Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1655in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1656
7ce691ae 1657@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1658@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1659@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1660@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1661Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1662with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1663
252b5132
RH
1664@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1665@item --force-exe-suffix
1666Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1667
1668If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1669@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1670the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1671option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1672Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1673it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1674
1675@kindex --gc-sections
1676@kindex --no-gc-sections
1677@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1678@item --gc-sections
1679@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1680Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1681targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1682performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1683@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1684collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1685implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1686
d5465ba2
AM
1687@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1688examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1689symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1690command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1691referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1692libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1693referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1694the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1695relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1696@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1697
ac69cbc6 1698This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1699@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1700specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1701@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1702command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1703
c17d87de
NC
1704@kindex --print-gc-sections
1705@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1706@cindex garbage collection
1707@item --print-gc-sections
1708@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1709List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1710printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1711collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1712default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1713be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1714line.
1715
22185505 1716@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1717@cindex garbage collection
1718@item --gc-keep-exported
1719When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1720collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1721default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1722executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1723collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1724Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1725it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1726ELF format targets.
1727
30824704
RM
1728@kindex --print-output-format
1729@cindex output format
1730@item --print-output-format
1731Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1732other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1733in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1734
3604cb1f
TG
1735@kindex --print-memory-usage
1736@cindex memory usage
1737@item --print-memory-usage
1738Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1739the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1740quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1741headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1742parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1743
1744@smallexample
1745Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1746 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1747 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1748@end smallexample
1749
252b5132
RH
1750@cindex help
1751@cindex usage
1752@kindex --help
1753@item --help
1754Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1755
ea20a7da
CC
1756@kindex --target-help
1757@item --target-help
a094d01f 1758Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1759
2509a395
SL
1760@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1762Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1763@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1764
1765@cindex memory usage
1766@kindex --no-keep-memory
1767@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1768@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1769symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1770instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1771necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1772while linking a large executable.
1773
1774@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1775@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1776@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1777@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1778@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1779Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1780is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1781The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1782behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1783libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1784
97a232d7
NC
1785The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1786
aa713662
L
1787@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1788@kindex -z muldefs
1789@item --allow-multiple-definition
1790@itemx -z muldefs
1791Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1792report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1793first definition will be used.
1794
b79e8c78 1795@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1796@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1797@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1798@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1799Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1800This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1801determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1802shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1803how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1804
903249d7
NC
1805The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1806referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1807an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1808a shared library.
1809
1810The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1811libraries specified at link time are that:
1812
1813@itemize @bullet
1814@item
1815A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1816that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1817resolvable at load time.
1818@item
1819There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1820symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1821
1822The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1823select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1824architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1825appropriate memset function.
1826@end itemize
b79e8c78 1827
31941635
L
1828@kindex --no-undefined-version
1829@item --no-undefined-version
1830Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1831it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1832will be issued instead.
1833
3e3b46e5
PB
1834@kindex --default-symver
1835@item --default-symver
1836Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1837exported symbols.
1838
1839@kindex --default-imported-symver
1840@item --default-imported-symver
1841Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1842imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1843
252b5132
RH
1844@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1845@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1846Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1847files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1848been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1849This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1850errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1851have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1852inappropriate.
1853
fe7929ce
AM
1854@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1855@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1856Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1857library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1858
252b5132
RH
1859@kindex --no-whole-archive
1860@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1861Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1862archive files.
1863
1864@cindex output file after errors
1865@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1866@item --noinhibit-exec
1867Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1868Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1869errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1870when it issues any error whatsoever.
1871
0a9c1c8e
CD
1872@kindex -nostdlib
1873@item -nostdlib
1874Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1875command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1876(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1877
252b5132 1878@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1879@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1880@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1881@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1882file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1883@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1884object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1885object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1886should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1887usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1888name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1889list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1890command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1891this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1892@end ifclear
1893
76359541
TP
1894@kindex --out-implib
1895@item --out-implib @var{file}
1896Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1897the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1898library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1899may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1900behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1901step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1902the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1903
36af4a4e
JJ
1904@kindex -pie
1905@kindex --pic-executable
1906@item -pie
1907@itemx --pic-executable
1908@cindex position independent executables
1909Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1910ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1911libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1912address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1913normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1914defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1915
252b5132
RH
1916@kindex -qmagic
1917@item -qmagic
1918This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1919
1920@kindex -Qy
1921@item -Qy
1922This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1923
1924@kindex --relax
1925@cindex synthesizing linker
1926@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1927@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1928@item --relax
28d5f677 1929@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1930An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1931@ifset GENERIC
1932This option is only supported on a few targets.
1933@end ifset
1934@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1935@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1936@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1937@ifset XTENSA
1938@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1939@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1940@ifset M68HC11
1941@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1942@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1943@ifset NIOSII
1944@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1945@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1946@ifset POWERPC
1947@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1948@end ifset
252b5132 1949
a094d01f 1950On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1951global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1952addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1953synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1954instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1955
1956On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1957debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1958@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1959This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1960family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1961@end ifset
1962
1963@ifset GENERIC
1964On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1965but ignored.
1966@end ifset
1967
28d5f677
NC
1968On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1969@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1970
252b5132
RH
1971@cindex retaining specified symbols
1972@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1973@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1974@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1975@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1976Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1977discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1978symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1979@ifset GENERIC
1980(such as VxWorks)
1981@end ifset
1982where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1983run-time memory.
1984
1985@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1986or symbols needed for relocations.
1987
1988You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1989line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1990
1991@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1992@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1993@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1994@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1995Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1996linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1997arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
1998them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1999
2000The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2001are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2002description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2003in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2004have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2005
2006If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2007contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2008is defined.
252b5132 2009
ff5dcc92 2010The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 2011SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
2012@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2013runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2014options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2015gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 2016file systems.
252b5132 2017
ff5dcc92 2018For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 2019followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 2020the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
2021@end ifset
2022
2023@ifset GENERIC
2024@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
2025@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2026@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
2027When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2028happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2029of the input files.
2030
2031When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2032non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2033shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 2034explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 2035specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 2036@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
2037either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2038appearing multiple times.
2039
e680a6b6
NC
2040The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2041directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2042containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2043and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
204464-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2045
2046The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2047@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2048supported.
2049
28c309a2
NC
2050This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2051that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2052is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2053runtime linker would do.
2054
252b5132 2055The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2056libraries:
d8e4137b 2057
252b5132
RH
2058@enumerate
2059@item
ff5dcc92 2060Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2061@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2062Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2063between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2064specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2065used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2066at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2067by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2068the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2069@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2070On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2071@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2072environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2073@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2074On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2075directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2076@item
a1b8d843 2077For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2078variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2079@item
ec4eb78a
L
2080For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2081@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2082libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2083@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2084@item
252b5132
RH
2085The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2086@item
d8e4137b
NC
2087For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2088exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2089to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2090defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2091configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2092@item
2093For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2094the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2095header file.
2096@item
2097Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2098linker script being used.
252b5132
RH
2099@end enumerate
2100
2101If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2102warning and continue with the link.
2103@end ifset
2104
2105@kindex -shared
2106@kindex -Bshareable
2107@item -shared
2108@itemx -Bshareable
2109@cindex shared libraries
2110Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2111and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2112shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2113undefined symbols in the link.
2114
252b5132 2115@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2116@item --sort-common
2117@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2118@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2119This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2120ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2121sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2122eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2123between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2124specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2125
2509a395
SL
2126@kindex --sort-section=name
2127@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2128This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2129patterns in the linker script.
2130
2509a395
SL
2131@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2132@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2133This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2134patterns in the linker script.
2135
a70f34c0
NC
2136@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2137@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2138This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2139.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2140post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2141
252b5132 2142@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2143@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2144Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2145each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2146size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2147
2148@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2149@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2150Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2151output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2152This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2153certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2154cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2155that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2156support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2157input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2158more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2159many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2160
2161@kindex --stats
2162@item --stats
2163Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2164as execution time and memory usage.
2165
2509a395 2166@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2167@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2168Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2169configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2170that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2171
a70f34c0
NC
2172@kindex --task-link
2173@item --task-link
2174This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2175file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2176
252b5132
RH
2177@kindex --traditional-format
2178@cindex traditional format
2179@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2180For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2181the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2182use the traditional format instead.
2183
2184@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2185For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2186symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2187full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2188@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2189trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2190combine duplicate entries.
2191
2509a395
SL
2192@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2193@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2194Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2195address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2196times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2197line.
2198@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2199for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2200@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2201should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2202sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2203
2509a395
SL
2204@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2205@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2206@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2207@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2208@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2209@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2210@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2211Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2212@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2213
2509a395
SL
2214@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2215@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2216@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2217When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2218byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2219
9d5777a3
RM
2220@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2221@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2222@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2223When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2224the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2225text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2226
0d705e9f
AM
2227@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2228@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2229@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2230When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2231model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2232
560e09e9
NC
2233@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2234@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2235Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2236values for @samp{method}:
2237
2238@table @samp
2239@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2240Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2241
2242@item report-all
da8bce14 2243Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2244
2245@item ignore-in-object-files
2246Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2247ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2248
2249@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2250Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2251ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2252when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2253libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2254command line.
2255@end table
2256
2257The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2258by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2259
2260Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2261unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2262can change this to a warning.
2263
1715a13c
L
2264@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2265@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2266@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2267@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2268Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2269supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2270the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2271argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2272
2273@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2274@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2275@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2276Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2277used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2278about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2279is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2280see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2281use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2282symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2283@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2284
7ce691ae 2285@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2286@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2287@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2288@item --warn-common
2289Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2290a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2291but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2292you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2293Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2294warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2295
2296There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2297
2298@table @samp
2299@item int i = 1;
2300A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2301file.
2302
2303@item extern int i;
2304An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2305There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2306variable somewhere.
2307
2308@item int i;
2309A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2310variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2311The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2312single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2313size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2314a definition of the same variable.
2315@end table
2316
2317The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2318Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2319just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2320encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2321a common symbol.
2322
2323@enumerate
2324@item
2325Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2326definition for the symbol.
2327@smallexample
2328@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2329 overridden by definition
2330@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2331@end smallexample
2332
2333@item
2334Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2335the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2336except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2337@smallexample
2338@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2339 overriding common
2340@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2341@end smallexample
2342
2343@item
2344Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2345@smallexample
2346@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2347 of `@var{symbol}'
2348@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2349@end smallexample
2350
2351@item
2352Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2353@smallexample
2354@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2355 overridden by larger common
2356@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2357@end smallexample
2358
2359@item
2360Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2361the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2362encountered in a different order.
2363@smallexample
2364@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2365 overriding smaller common
2366@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2367@end smallexample
2368@end enumerate
2369
2370@kindex --warn-constructors
2371@item --warn-constructors
2372Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2373object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2374detect the use of global constructors.
2375
2376@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2377@item --warn-multiple-gp
2378Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2379This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2380Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2381section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2382of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2383base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2384base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2385bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2386large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2387values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2388option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2389
2390@kindex --warn-once
2391@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2392@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2393@item --warn-once
2394Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2395which refers to it.
2396
2397@kindex --warn-section-align
2398@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2399@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2400@item --warn-section-align
2401Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2402alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2403The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2404is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2405the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2406
8fdd7217
NC
2407@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2408@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2409Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2410
a0c402a5
L
2411@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2412@item --warn-alternate-em
2413Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2414
560e09e9
NC
2415@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2416@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2417If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2418@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2419This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2420
2421@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2422@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2423This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2424it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2425
252b5132
RH
2426@kindex --whole-archive
2427@cindex including an entire archive
2428@item --whole-archive
2429For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2430@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2431in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2432files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2433library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2434library. This option may be used more than once.
2435
7ec229ce 2436Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2437about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2438Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2439list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2440your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2441
2509a395
SL
2442@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2443@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2444Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2445@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2446undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2447@var{symbol}.
2448
2449This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2450wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2451wishes to call the system function, it should call
2452@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2453
2454Here is a trivial example:
2455
2456@smallexample
2457void *
cc2f008e 2458__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2459@{
cc2f008e 2460 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2461 return __real_malloc (c);
2462@}
2463@end smallexample
2464
ff5dcc92 2465If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2466all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2467instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2468call the real @code{malloc} function.
2469
2470You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2471links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2472you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2473file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2474call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2475
4ea904ed
SH
2476Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2477internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2478@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2479@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2480
2481@smallexample
2482int
2483f (void)
2484@{
2485 return 123;
2486@}
2487
2488int
2489g (void)
2490@{
2491 return f();
2492@}
2493@end smallexample
2494
6aa29e7b 2495@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2496@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2497@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2498@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2499Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2500(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2501section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2502
e41b3a13
JJ
2503@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2504@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2505Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2506generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2507if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2508
6c1439be
L
2509@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2510@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2511@item --enable-new-dtags
2512@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2513This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2514systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2515@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2516and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2517If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2518created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2519those options are only available for ELF systems.
2520
2d643429 2521@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2522@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2523Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2524close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2525time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2526increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2527value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2528
fdc90cb4
JJ
2529@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2530@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2531Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2532@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2533new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2534the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2535hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2536but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2537
0ce398f1
L
2538@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2539@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2540@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2541@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2542@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2543@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2544@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2545@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2546On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2547compressed using zlib.
2548
2549@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2550sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2551DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2552instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2553also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2554sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2555
2556The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2557@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2558
2559Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2560sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2561for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2562uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2563
2564The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2565involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2566default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2567@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2568
35835446
JR
2569@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2570@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2571This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2572linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2573for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2574about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2575
4f9c04f7 2576Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25771021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2578run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2579has been used.
2580
2581The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2582enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2583
c0065db7
RM
2584@kindex --build-id
2585@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2586@item --build-id
2587@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2588Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2589or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2590unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2591@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2592@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2593@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2594the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2595string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2596@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2597is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2598
2599The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2600that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2601unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2602to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2603file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2604string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2605
2606Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2607@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2608@end table
2609
0285c67d
NC
2610@c man end
2611
36f63dca 2612@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2613
0285c67d
NC
2614@c man begin OPTIONS
2615
ff5dcc92 2616The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2617the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2618normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2619use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2620@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2621like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2622symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2623object file).
2624
2625In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2626support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2627PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2628values by either a space or an equals sign.
2629
ff5dcc92 2630@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2631
2632@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2633@item --add-stdcall-alias
2634If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2635as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2636[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2637
2638@kindex --base-file
2639@item --base-file @var{file}
2640Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2641addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2642@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2643[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2644
2645@kindex --dll
2646@item --dll
2647Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2648@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2649file.
bb10df36 2650[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2651
88183869
DK
2652@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2653@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2654@item --enable-long-section-names
2655@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2656The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2657the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2658for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2659fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2660to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2661allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2662disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2663generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2664as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2665with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2666GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2667information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2668option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2669section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2670when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2671image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2672[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2673
252b5132
RH
2674@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2675@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2676@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2677@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2678If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2679do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2680only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2681resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2682undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2683@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2684to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2685warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2686import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2687to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2688feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2689@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2690mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2691[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2692
522f09cd
KT
2693@kindex --leading-underscore
2694@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2695@item --leading-underscore
2696@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2697For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2698in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2699disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2700
252b5132
RH
2701@cindex DLLs, creating
2702@kindex --export-all-symbols
2703@item --export-all-symbols
2704If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2705be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2706otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2707explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2708attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2709option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2710@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2711@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2712exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2713re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2714such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2715@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2716@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2717Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2718not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2719extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2720(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2721These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2722@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2723@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2724@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2725@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2726[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2727
2728@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2729@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2730Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2731exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2732[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2733
2927aaca
NC
2734@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2735@item --exclude-all-symbols
2736Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2737[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2738
252b5132
RH
2739@kindex --file-alignment
2740@item --file-alignment
2741Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2742file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2743512.
bb10df36 2744[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2745
2746@cindex heap size
2747@kindex --heap
2748@item --heap @var{reserve}
2749@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2750Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2751to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2752committed.
bb10df36 2753[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2754
2755@cindex image base
2756@kindex --image-base
2757@item --image-base @var{value}
2758Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2759the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2760is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2761your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2762other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2763for dlls.
bb10df36 2764[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2765
2766@kindex --kill-at
2767@item --kill-at
2768If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2769symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2770[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2771
26d2d8a2
BF
2772@kindex --large-address-aware
2773@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2774If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2775header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2776greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2777or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2778section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2779[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2780
f69a2f97
NC
2781@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2782@item --disable-large-address-aware
2783Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2784This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2785driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2786addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2787[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2788
252b5132
RH
2789@kindex --major-image-version
2790@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2791Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2792[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2793
2794@kindex --major-os-version
2795@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2796Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2797[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2798
2799@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2800@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2801Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2802[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2803
2804@kindex --minor-image-version
2805@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2806Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2807[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2808
2809@kindex --minor-os-version
2810@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2811Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2812[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2813
2814@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2815@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2816Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2817[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2818
2819@cindex DEF files, creating
2820@cindex DLLs, creating
2821@kindex --output-def
2822@item --output-def @var{file}
2823The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2824file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2825(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2826library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2827automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2828[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2829
b044cda1 2830@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2831@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2832@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2833@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2834Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2835@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2836By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2837for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2838execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2839[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2840
2841@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2842@item --disable-auto-image-base
2843Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2844user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2845default.
bb10df36 2846[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2847
2848@cindex DLLs, linking to
2849@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2850@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2851When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2852search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2853@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2854between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2855uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2856@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2857[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2858
2859@kindex --enable-auto-import
2860@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2861Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2862DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2863mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2864[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2865
2866The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2867feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2868
2869Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2870of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2871PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2872
e2a83dd0
NC
2873Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2874data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2875placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2876around a problem with consts that is described here:
2877http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2878
4d8907ac
DS
2879Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2880see this message:
0d888aac 2881
ece2d90e 2882"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2883documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2884
ece2d90e
NC
2885This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2886ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2887allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2888fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2889constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2890multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2891this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2892of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2893the warning, and exit.
2894
2895There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2896data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2897
2fa9fc65
NC
2898One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2899of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2900this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2901
c0065db7
RM
2902A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2903that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2904there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2905a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2906
2907@example
2908extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2909extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2910 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2911@end example
2912
2913or
2914
2915@example
2916extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2917extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2918 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2919@end example
2920
c0065db7 2921For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2922is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2923
2924@example
2925extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2926extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2927 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2928@end example
2929
c406afaf
NC
2930or
2931
2932@example
2933extern long long extern_ll;
2934extern_ll -->
2935 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2936@end example
2937
2fa9fc65 2938A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2939'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2940@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2941requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2942building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2943merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2944between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2945constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2946
2947Original:
2948@example
2949--foo.h
2950extern int arr[];
2951--foo.c
2952#include "foo.h"
2953void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2954 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2955@}
2956@end example
2957
2958Solution 1:
2959@example
2960--foo.h
2961extern int arr[];
2962--foo.c
2963#include "foo.h"
2964void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2965 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2966 volatile int *parr = arr;
2967 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2968@}
2969@end example
2970
2971Solution 2:
2972@example
2973--foo.h
2974/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2975#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2976 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2977#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2978#else
2979#define FOO_IMPORT
2980#endif
2981extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2982--foo.c
2983#include "foo.h"
2984void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2985 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2986@}
2987@end example
2988
c0065db7 2989A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2990library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2991for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2992functions).
b044cda1
CW
2993
2994@kindex --disable-auto-import
2995@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2996Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2997@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2998[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2999
2fa9fc65
NC
3000@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3001@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3002If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3003that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3004a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 3005environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 3006[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
3007
3008@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3009@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 3010Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3011[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 3012
b044cda1
CW
3013@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3014@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3015Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 3016[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3017
252b5132
RH
3018@kindex --section-alignment
3019@item --section-alignment
3020Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3021addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 3022[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3023
3024@cindex stack size
3025@kindex --stack
3026@item --stack @var{reserve}
3027@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 3028Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 3029to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 3030committed.
bb10df36 3031[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3032
3033@kindex --subsystem
3034@item --subsystem @var{which}
3035@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3036@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3037Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3038legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
3039@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3040the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3041@var{which}.
bb10df36 3042[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 3043
2f563b51
DK
3044The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3045of the PE file header:
3046[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3047
2d5c3743
NC
3048@kindex --high-entropy-va
3049@item --high-entropy-va
3050Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3051(ASLR).
dc9bd8c9
HD
3052This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3053@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2d5c3743 3054
2f563b51
DK
3055@kindex --dynamicbase
3056@item --dynamicbase
3057The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3058randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3059Vista for i386 PE targets.
dc9bd8c9 3060This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2f563b51
DK
3061
3062@kindex --forceinteg
3063@item --forceinteg
3064Code integrity checks are enforced.
3065
3066@kindex --nxcompat
3067@item --nxcompat
3068The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3069This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3070
3071@kindex --no-isolation
3072@item --no-isolation
3073Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3074
3075@kindex --no-seh
3076@item --no-seh
3077The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3078this image.
3079
3080@kindex --no-bind
3081@item --no-bind
3082Do not bind this image.
3083
3084@kindex --wdmdriver
3085@item --wdmdriver
3086The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3087
2f563b51
DK
3088@kindex --tsaware
3089@item --tsaware
3090The image is Terminal Server aware.
3091
0cb112f7
CF
3092@kindex --insert-timestamp
3093@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3094@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3095Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3096as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3097other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3098will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3099same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3100can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3101that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3102identically.
dc9bd8c9
HD
3103
3104@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3105@item --enable-reloc-section
3106Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3107is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
252b5132
RH
3108@end table
3109
0285c67d
NC
3110@c man end
3111
ac145307
BS
3112@ifset C6X
3113@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3114
3115@c man begin OPTIONS
3116
3117The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3118libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3119all executables use an index of 0.
3120
3121@table @gcctabopt
3122
3123@kindex --dsbt-size
3124@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3125This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3126or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3127entries.
3128
3129@kindex --dsbt-index
3130@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3131This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3132to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3133executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3134@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3135
fbd9ad90
PB
3136@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3137The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3138exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3139
ac145307
BS
3140@end table
3141
3142@c man end
3143@end ifset
3144
b8891f8d
AJ
3145@ifset CSKY
3146@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3147
3148@c man begin OPTIONS
3149
3150@table @gcctabopt
3151
3152@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3153@item --branch-stub
3154This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3155sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3156usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3157can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3158the compiler or assembler.
3159
3160@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3161@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3162This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3163It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3164be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3165stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3166sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3167@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3168linker should choose suitable defaults.
3169
3170@end table
3171
3172@c man end
3173@end ifset
3174
93fd0973
SC
3175@ifset M68HC11
3176@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3177
3178@c man begin OPTIONS
3179
3180The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3181memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3182
3183@table @gcctabopt
3184
3185@kindex --no-trampoline
3186@item --no-trampoline
3187This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3188is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3189instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3190
3191@kindex --bank-window
3192@item --bank-window @var{name}
3193This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3194the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3195The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3196paging and addresses within the memory window.
3197
3198@end table
3199
3200@c man end
3201@end ifset
3202
7fb9f789
NC
3203@ifset M68K
3204@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3205
3206@c man begin OPTIONS
3207
3208The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3209when linking for 68K targets.
3210
3211@table @gcctabopt
3212
3213@kindex --got
3214@item --got=@var{type}
3215This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3216@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3217@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3218Info entry for @file{ld}.
3219
3220@end table
3221
3222@c man end
3223@end ifset
3224
833794fc
MR
3225@ifset MIPS
3226@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3227
3228@c man begin OPTIONS
3229
3230The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3231generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3232linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3233
3234@table @gcctabopt
3235
3236@kindex --insn32
3237@item --insn32
3238@kindex --no-insn32
3239@itemx --no-insn32
3240These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3241generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3242or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
324332-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3244used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3245possible.
3246
8b10b0b3
MR
3247@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3248@item --ignore-branch-isa
3249@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3250@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3251These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3252transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3253accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3254is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3255instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3256equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3257calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3258a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3259an error.
3260
3734320d
MF
3261@kindex --compact-branches
3262@item --compact-branches
3263@kindex --no-compact-branches
fa1477dc 3264@itemx --no-compact-branches
3734320d
MF
3265These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3266in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3267
833794fc
MR
3268@end table
3269
3270@c man end
3271@end ifset
3272
fa1477dc
SC
3273
3274@ifset PDP11
3275@subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3276
3277@c man begin OPTIONS
3278
3279For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3280produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3281for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3282targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3283defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3284here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3285
3286@table @gcctabopt
3287
3288@kindex -N
3289@item -N
3290@kindex --omagic
3291@itemx --omagic
3292
3293Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3294indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3295shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3296writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3297the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3298programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3299from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3300
3301@kindex -n
3302@item -n
3303@kindex --nmagic
3304@itemx --nmagic
3305
3306Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3307indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3308be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3309file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3310byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3311a @emph{pure executable} format.
3312
3313@kindex -z
3314@item -z
3315@kindex --imagic
3316@itemx --imagic
3317
3318Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3319indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3320data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3321instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3322larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3323to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3324shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3325option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3326and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3327this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3328executable} format.
3329
3330@kindex --no-omagic
3331@item --no-omagic
3332
3333Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3334
3335@end table
3336
3337@c man end
3338@end ifset
3339
252b5132
RH
3340@ifset UsesEnvVars
3341@node Environment
3342@section Environment Variables
3343
0285c67d
NC
3344@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3345
560e09e9 3346You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3347@ifclear SingleFormat
3348@code{GNUTARGET},
3349@end ifclear
3350@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3351
36f63dca 3352@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3353@kindex GNUTARGET
3354@cindex default input format
3355@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3356use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3357of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3358@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3359of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3360attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3361this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3362there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3363object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3364BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3365in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3366@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3367
3368@kindex LDEMULATION
3369@cindex default emulation
3370@cindex emulation, default
3371@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3372@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3373behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3374available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3375the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3376variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3377linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3378
3379@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3380@cindex demangling, default
3381Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3382@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3383default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3384a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3385may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3386options.
3387
0285c67d
NC
3388@c man end
3389@end ifset
3390
252b5132
RH
3391@node Scripts
3392@chapter Linker Scripts
3393
3394@cindex scripts
3395@cindex linker scripts
3396@cindex command files
3397Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3398written in the linker command language.
3399
3400The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3401the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3402the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3403more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3404direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3405described below.
3406
3407The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3408yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3409linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3410to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3411such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3412
3413You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3414line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3415default linker script.
3416
3417You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3418to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3419Linker Scripts}.
3420
3421@menu
3422* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3423* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3424* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3425* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3426* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3427* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3428* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3429* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3430* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3431* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3432* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3433@end menu
3434
3435@node Basic Script Concepts
3436@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3437@cindex linker script concepts
3438We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3439describe the linker script language.
3440
3441The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3442file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3443@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3444The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3445purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3446among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3447section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3448in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3449
3450Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3451also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3452contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3453the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3454A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3455area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3456loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3457which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3458of debugging information.
3459
3460Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3461first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3462the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3463@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3464section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3465same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3466is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3467(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3468based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3469RAM address would be the VMA.
3470
3471You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3472program with the @samp{-h} option.
3473
3474Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3475@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3476has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3477information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3478will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3479static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3480referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3481
3482You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3483program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3484option.
3485
3486@node Script Format
3487@section Linker Script Format
3488@cindex linker script format
3489Linker scripts are text files.
3490
3491You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3492either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3493symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3494generally ignored.
3495
3496Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3497If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3498otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3499double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3500file name.
3501
3502You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3503@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3504to whitespace.
3505
3506@node Simple Example
3507@section Simple Linker Script Example
3508@cindex linker script example
3509@cindex example of linker script
3510Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3511
3512The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3513@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3514memory layout of the output file.
3515
3516The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3517describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3518code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3519@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3520Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3521your input files.
3522
3523For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
35240x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3525linker script which will do that:
3526@smallexample
3527SECTIONS
3528@{
3529 . = 0x10000;
3530 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3531 . = 0x8000000;
3532 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3533 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3534@}
3535@end smallexample
3536
3537You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3538followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3539descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3540
252b5132
RH
3541The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3542sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3543counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3544other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3545current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3546incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3547@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3548
3549The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3550required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3551after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3552which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3553wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3554means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3555
3556Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3557@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3558@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3559
3560The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3561the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3562at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3563output section, the value of the location counter will be
3564@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3565effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3566immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3567
3568The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3569alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3570example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3571sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3572may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3573sections.
3574
3575That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3576
3577@node Simple Commands
3578@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3579@cindex linker script simple commands
3580In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3581
3582@menu
3583* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3584* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3585@ifclear SingleFormat
3586* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3587@end ifclear
3588
4a93e180 3589* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3590* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3591@end menu
3592
3593@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3594@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3595@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3596@cindex start of execution
3597@cindex first instruction
3598@cindex entry point
3599The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3600point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3601entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3602@smallexample
3603ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3604@end smallexample
3605
3606There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3607entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3608stopping when one of them succeeds:
3609@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3610@item
252b5132 3611the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3612@item
252b5132 3613the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3614@item
a094d01f 3615the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3616targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3617check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3618@item
252b5132 3619the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3620@item
252b5132
RH
3621The address @code{0}.
3622@end itemize
3623
3624@node File Commands
36f63dca 3625@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3626@cindex linker script file commands
3627Several linker script commands deal with files.
3628
3629@table @code
3630@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3631@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3632@cindex including a linker script
3633Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3634be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3635with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
363610 levels deep.
3637
4006703d
NS
3638You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3639@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3640
252b5132
RH
3641@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3642@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3643@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3644@cindex input files in linker scripts
3645@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3646@cindex linker script input object files
3647The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3648in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3649
3650For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3651a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3652then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3653
3654In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3655script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3656
e3f2db7f
AO
3657In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3658with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3659located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
16171946
FS
3660for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
3661@code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
3662filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
3663@samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3664
3665If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
3666the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
3667found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
3668not found the linker will search through the archive library search
3669path.
252b5132 3670
ff5dcc92 3671If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3672name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3673@samp{-l}.
3674
3675When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3676files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3677script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3678
3679@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3680@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3681@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3682@cindex grouping input files
3683The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3684files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3685new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3686in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3687
b717d30e
JJ
3688@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3689@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3690@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3691This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3692commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3693as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3694with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3695when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3696@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3697and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3698setting afterwards.
3699
252b5132
RH
3700@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3701@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3702@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3703The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3704@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3705@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3706Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3707precedence.
3708
3709You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3710output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3711
3712@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3713@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3714@cindex library search path in linker script
3715@cindex archive search path in linker script
3716@cindex search path in linker script
3717The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3718@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3719@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3720on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3721are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3722the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3723
3724@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3725@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3726@cindex first input file
3727The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3728that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3729though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3730when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3731first file.
3732@end table
3733
3734@ifclear SingleFormat
3735@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3736@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3737A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3738
3739@table @code
3740@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3741@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3742@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3743@cindex output file format in linker script
3744The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3745output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3746exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3747(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3748line option takes precedence.
3749
3750You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3751formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3752This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3753desired endianness.
3754
3755If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3756will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3757output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3758used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3759
3760For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3761command:
3762@smallexample
3763OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3764@end smallexample
3765This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3766@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3767option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3768format.
3769
3770@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3771@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3772@cindex input file format in linker script
3773The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3774files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3775This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3776(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3777is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3778command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3779@end table
3780@end ifclear
3781
4a93e180
NC
3782@node REGION_ALIAS
3783@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3784@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3785@cindex region alias
3786@cindex region names
3787
3788Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3789@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3790
3791@smallexample
3792REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3793@end smallexample
3794
3795The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3796memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3797to memory regions. An example follows.
3798
3799Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3800memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3801that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3802non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3803access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3804read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3805sections:
3806
3807@itemize @bullet
3808@item
3809@code{.text} program code;
3810@item
3811@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3812@item
3813@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3814@item
3815@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3816@end itemize
3817
3818The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3819part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3820output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3821systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3822@code{C}:
3823@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3824@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3825@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3826@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3827@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3828@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3829@end multitable
3830The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3831loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3832the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3833the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3834
3835The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3836includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3837memory layout:
3838@smallexample
3839INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3840
3841SECTIONS
3842 @{
3843 .text :
3844 @{
3845 *(.text)
3846 @} > REGION_TEXT
3847 .rodata :
3848 @{
3849 *(.rodata)
3850 rodata_end = .;
3851 @} > REGION_RODATA
3852 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3853 @{
3854 data_start = .;
3855 *(.data)
3856 @} > REGION_DATA
3857 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3858 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3859 .bss :
3860 @{
3861 *(.bss)
3862 @} > REGION_BSS
3863 @}
3864@end smallexample
3865
3866Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3867regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3868variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3869@table @code
3870@item A
3871Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3872@smallexample
3873MEMORY
3874 @{
3875 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3876 @}
3877
3878REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3879REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3880REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3881REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3882@end smallexample
3883@item B
3884Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3885into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3886@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3887@smallexample
3888MEMORY
3889 @{
3890 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3891 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3892 @}
3893
3894REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3895REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3896REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3897REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3898@end smallexample
3899@item C
3900Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3901@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3902initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3903system start into the @code{RAM}.
3904@smallexample
3905MEMORY
3906 @{
3907 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3908 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3909 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3910 @}
3911
3912REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3913REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3914REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3915REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3916@end smallexample
3917@end table
3918
3919It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3920@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3921necessary:
3922@smallexample
3923#include <string.h>
3924
3925extern char data_start [];
3926extern char data_size [];
3927extern char data_load_start [];
3928
3929void copy_data(void)
3930@{
3931 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3932 @{
3933 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3934 @}
3935@}
3936@end smallexample
3937
252b5132 3938@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3939@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3940There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3941
3942@table @code
3943@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3944@kindex ASSERT
3945@cindex assertion in linker script
3946Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3947with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3948
fd1c4238
NC
3949Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3950take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3951inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3952for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3953symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3954
3955@smallexample
3956 .stack :
3957 @{
3958 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3959 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3960 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3961 @}
3962@end smallexample
3963
3964will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3965PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3966can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3967
3968@smallexample
3969 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3970 .stack :
3971 @{
3972 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3973 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3974 @}
3975@end smallexample
3976
3977will work.
3978
252b5132
RH
3979@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3980@kindex EXTERN
3981@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3982Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3983symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3984modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3985each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3986command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3987
3988@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3989@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3990@cindex common allocation in linker script
3991This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3992to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3993output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3994
4818e05f
AM
3995@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3996@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3997@cindex common allocation in linker script
3998This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3999command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
4000to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
4001
7bdf4127
AB
4002@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4003@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4004@cindex group allocation in linker script
4005@cindex section groups
4006@cindex COMDAT
4007This command has the same effect as the
4008@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4009@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4010and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4011specified (@samp{-r}).
4012
53d25da6
AM
4013@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4014@kindex INSERT
4015@cindex insert user script into default script
4016This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4017augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4018inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4019@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4020default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4021sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4022linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4023insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4024linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4025default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4026of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4027to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4028is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4029
4030@smallexample
4031SECTIONS
4032@{
4033 OVERLAY :
4034 @{
4035 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4036 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4037 @}
4038@}
4039INSERT AFTER .text;
4040@end smallexample
4041
252b5132
RH
4042@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4043@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4044@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 4045This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
4046references among certain output sections.
4047
4048In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4049using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4050will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4051errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4052a function defined in the other section.
4053
4054The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 4055@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
4056an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4057@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4058names.
4059
cdf96953
MF
4060@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4061@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4062@cindex cross references
4063This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4064references to one section from a list of other sections.
4065
4066The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4067output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4068a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4069there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4070must never call back.
4071
4072The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4073The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4074If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4075the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4076status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4077names, not input section names.
4078
252b5132
RH
4079@ifclear SingleFormat
4080@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4081@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4082@cindex machine architecture
4083@cindex architecture
4084Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4085of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4086architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4087the @samp{-f} option.
4088@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
4089
4090@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4091@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4092This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4093@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4094in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4095@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
4096@end table
4097
4098@node Assignments
4099@section Assigning Values to Symbols
4100@cindex assignment in scripts
4101@cindex symbol definition, scripts
4102@cindex variables, defining
4103You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 4104the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
4105
4106@menu
4107* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 4108* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 4109* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 4110* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 4111* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
4112@end menu
4113
4114@node Simple Assignments
4115@subsection Simple Assignments
4116
4117You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4118
4119@table @code
4120@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4121@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4122@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4123@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4124@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4125@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4126@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4127@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4128@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4129@end table
4130
4131The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4132@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4133defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4134
4135The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4136may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4137
4138The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4139
4140Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4141
4142You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4143statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4144section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4145
4146The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4147expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4148
4149Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4150assignments may be used:
4151
4152@smallexample
4153floating_point = 0;
4154SECTIONS
4155@{
4156 .text :
4157 @{
4158 *(.text)
4159 _etext = .;
4160 @}
156e34dd 4161 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4162 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4163@}
4164@end smallexample
4165@noindent
4166In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4167zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4168the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4169defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4170upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4171
eb8476a6
MR
4172@node HIDDEN
4173@subsection HIDDEN
4174@cindex HIDDEN
4175For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4176exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4177
4178Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4179@code{HIDDEN}:
4180
4181@smallexample
4182HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4183SECTIONS
4184@{
4185 .text :
4186 @{
4187 *(.text)
4188 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4189 @}
4190 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4191 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4192@}
4193@end smallexample
4194@noindent
4195In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4196
252b5132
RH
4197@node PROVIDE
4198@subsection PROVIDE
4199@cindex PROVIDE
4200In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4201only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4202the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4203@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4204@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4205@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4206@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4207@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4208
4209Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4210@smallexample
4211SECTIONS
4212@{
4213 .text :
4214 @{
4215 *(.text)
4216 _etext = .;
4217 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4218 @}
4219@}
4220@end smallexample
4221
4222In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4223underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4224the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4225underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4226If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4227linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4228
b0daac83
NC
4229Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4230defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4231that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4232when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4233@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4234
7af8e998
L
4235@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4236@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4237@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4238Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4239hidden and won't be exported.
4240
73ae6183
NC
4241@node Source Code Reference
4242@subsection Source Code Reference
4243
4244Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4245intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4246a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4247symbol that does not have a value.
4248
4249Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4250transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4251stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4252prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4253mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4254of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4255variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4256linker script variable might be referred to as:
4257
4258@smallexample
4259 extern int foo;
4260@end smallexample
4261
4262But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4263
4264@smallexample
4265 _foo = 1000;
4266@end smallexample
4267
4268In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4269transformation has taken place.
4270
4271When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4272things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4273in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4274second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4275table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4276contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4277value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4278
4279@smallexample
4280 int foo = 1000;
4281@end smallexample
4282
10bf6894 4283creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4284holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4285number 1000 is initially stored.
4286
4287When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4288first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4289memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4290So:
4291
4292@smallexample
4293 foo = 1;
4294@end smallexample
4295
4296looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4297associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4298address. Whereas:
4299
4300@smallexample
4301 int * a = & foo;
4302@end smallexample
4303
10bf6894 4304looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4305and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4306the variable @samp{a}.
4307
4308Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4309the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4310an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4311
4312@smallexample
4313 foo = 1000;
4314@end smallexample
4315
4316creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4317the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4318address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4319linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4320access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4321
4322Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4323you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4324use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4325section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4326linker script contains these declarations:
4327
4328@smallexample
4329@group
4330 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4331 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4332 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4333@end group
4334@end smallexample
4335
4336Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4337
4338@smallexample
4339@group
4340 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4341
73ae6183
NC
4342 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4343@end group
4344@end smallexample
4345
4346Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4347Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4348arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4349
4350@smallexample
4351@group
4352 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4353
4354 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4355@end group
4356@end smallexample
4357
4358Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4359operators.
73ae6183 4360
252b5132 4361@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4362@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4363@kindex SECTIONS
4364The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4365into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4366
4367The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4368@smallexample
4369SECTIONS
4370@{
4371 @var{sections-command}
4372 @var{sections-command}
4373 @dots{}
4374@}
4375@end smallexample
4376
4377Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4378
4379@itemize @bullet
4380@item
4381an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4382@item
4383a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4384@item
4385an output section description
4386@item
4387an overlay description
4388@end itemize
4389
4390The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4391@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4392those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4393understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4394the layout of the output file.
4395
4396Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4397below.
4398
4399If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4400linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4401section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4402input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4403example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4404in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4405
4406@menu
4407* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4408* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4409* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4410* Input Section:: Input section description
4411* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4412* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4413* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4414* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4415* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4416@end menu
4417
4418@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4419@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4420The full description of an output section looks like this:
4421@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4422@group
7e7d5768 4423@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4424 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4425 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4426 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4427 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4428 @{
4429 @var{output-section-command}
4430 @var{output-section-command}
4431 @dots{}
abc9061b 4432 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4433@end group
4434@end smallexample
4435
4436Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4437
4438The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4439name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4440The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4441the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4442The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4443
4444Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4445
4446@itemize @bullet
4447@item
4448a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4449@item
4450an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4451@item
4452data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4453@item
4454a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4455@end itemize
4456
4457@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4458@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4459@cindex name, section
4460@cindex section name
4461The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4462meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4463support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4464must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4465example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4466output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4467names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4468quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4469characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4470commas must be quoted.
4471
4472The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4473Discarding}.
4474
4475@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4476@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4477@cindex address, section
4478@cindex section address
4479The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4480address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4481is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4482
4483If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4484section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4485to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4486alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4487contained within the output section.
4488
4489The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4490
4491@itemize @bullet
4492@item
4493If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4494is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4495in that region.
4496
4497@item
4498If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4499regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4500section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4501be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4502
4503@item
4504If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4505the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4506counter.
4507@end itemize
4508
4509@noindent
4510For example:
4511
252b5132
RH
4512@smallexample
4513.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4514@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4515
252b5132
RH
4516@noindent
4517and
ea5cae92 4518
252b5132
RH
4519@smallexample
4520.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4521@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4522
252b5132
RH
4523@noindent
4524are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4525@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4526counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4527counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4528input sections.
252b5132
RH
4529
4530The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4531For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4532so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4533do something like this:
4534@smallexample
4535.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4536@end smallexample
4537@noindent
4538This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4539aligned upward to the specified value.
4540
4541Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4542location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4543sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4544
4545@node Input Section
36f63dca 4546@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4547@cindex input sections
4548@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4549The most common output section command is an input section description.
4550
4551The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4552You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4553in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4554map the input files into your memory layout.
4555
4556@menu
4557* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4558* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4559* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4560* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4561* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4562@end menu
4563
4564@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4565@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4566@cindex input section basics
4567An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4568by a list of section names in parentheses.
4569
4570The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4571describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4572
4573The most common input section description is to include all input
4574sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4575include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4576@smallexample
4577*(.text)
4578@end smallexample
4579@noindent
18625d54 4580Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4581@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4582of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4583match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4584example:
252b5132 4585@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4586EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4587@end smallexample
4588@noindent
4589will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4590and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4591placed inside the section list, for example:
4592@smallexample
b4346c09 4593*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4594@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4595@noindent
4596The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4597two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4598more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4599
4600There are two ways to include more than one section:
4601@smallexample
4602*(.text .rdata)
4603*(.text) *(.rdata)
4604@end smallexample
4605@noindent
4606The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4607@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4608first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4609they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4610@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4611@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4612
8f1732fc
AB
4613When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4614is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4615immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4616@smallexample
4617*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4618@end smallexample
4619@noindent
4620will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4621@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4622from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4623exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4624could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4625@smallexample
4626*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4627@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4628@noindent
4629Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4630before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4631all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4632@smallexample
4633EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4634@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4635
252b5132
RH
4636You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4637You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4638needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4639@smallexample
4640data.o(.data)
4641@end smallexample
4642
ae17ab41
CM
4643To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4644of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4645
4646Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4647
4648@smallexample
4649@group
4650SECTIONS @{
4651 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4652 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4653@}
4654@end group
4655@end smallexample
4656
4657In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4658input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4659@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4660@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4661whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4662
967928e9
AM
4663You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4664matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4665with no whitespace around the colon.
4666
4667@table @samp
4668@item archive:file
4669matches file within archive
4670@item archive:
4671matches the whole archive
4672@item :file
4673matches file but not one in an archive
4674@end table
4675
4676Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4677wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4678single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4679@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4680within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4681also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4682other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4683from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4684command.
4685
252b5132
RH
4686If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4687the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4688commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4689@smallexample
4690data.o
4691@end smallexample
4692
967928e9
AM
4693When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4694and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4695characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4696name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4697did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4698though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4699@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4700the archive search path.
4701
4702@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4703@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4704@cindex input section wildcards
4705@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4706@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4707@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4708In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4709name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4710
4711The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4712pattern for the file name.
4713
4714The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4715
4716@table @samp
4717@item *
4718matches any number of characters
4719@item ?
4720matches any single character
4721@item [@var{chars}]
4722matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4723character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4724@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4725@item \
4726quotes the following character
4727@end table
4728
4729When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4730will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4731Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4732exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4733@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4734a @samp{/} character.
4735
4736File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4737specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4738does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4739
4740If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4741appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4742will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4743sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4744@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4745@smallexample
4746.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4747.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4748@end smallexample
4749
bcaa7b3e 4750@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4751Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4752in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4753this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4754pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4755@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4756into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4757
bcaa7b3e 4758@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4759@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4760@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4761alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4762alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4763needed.
bcaa7b3e 4764
02ecc8e9 4765@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4766@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4767@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4768numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4769section name before placing them in the output file. In
4770@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4771the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4772@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4773
bcaa7b3e
L
4774@cindex SORT
4775@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4776
4777When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4778can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4779
4780@enumerate
4781@item
4782@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4783It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4784sections have the same name.
4785@item
4786@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4787It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4788sections have the same alignment.
4789@item
c0065db7 4790@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4791treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4792@item
4793@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4794is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4795@item
4796All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4797@end enumerate
4798
a05a5b64 4799When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4800section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4801takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4802
4803If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4804command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4805treated as nested sorting command.
4806
4807@enumerate
4808@item
4809@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4810@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4811@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4812@item
4813@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4814@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4815@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4816@end enumerate
4817
4818If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4819command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4820
eda680f8 4821@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4822@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4823section sorting option.
4824
252b5132
RH
4825If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4826@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4827precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4828
4829This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4830files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4831sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4832The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4833with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4834linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4835@smallexample
4836@group
4837SECTIONS @{
4838 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4839 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4840 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4841 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4842@}
4843@end group
4844@end smallexample
4845
4846@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4847@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4848@cindex common symbol placement
4849@cindex uninitialized data placement
4850A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4851file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4852linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4853named @samp{COMMON}.
4854
4855You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4856other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4857particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4858input files are placed in another section.
4859
4860In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4861@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4862@smallexample
4863.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4864@end smallexample
4865
4866@cindex scommon section
4867@cindex small common symbols
4868Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4869example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4870symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4871different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4872the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4873symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4874to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4875locations.
4876
4877@cindex [COMMON]
4878You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4879notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4880@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4881
4882@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4883@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4884@cindex KEEP
4885@cindex garbage collection
4886When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4887it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4888This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4889with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4890@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4891
4892@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4893@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4894The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4895to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4896start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4897@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4898follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4899@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4900@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4901All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4902files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4903
4904@smallexample
4905@group
4906SECTIONS @{
4907 outputa 0x10000 :
4908 @{
4909 all.o
4910 foo.o (.input1)
4911 @}
36f63dca
NC
4912@end group
4913@group
252b5132
RH
4914 outputb :
4915 @{
4916 foo.o (.input2)
4917 foo1.o (.input1)
4918 @}
36f63dca
NC
4919@end group
4920@group
252b5132
RH
4921 outputc :
4922 @{
4923 *(.input1)
4924 *(.input2)
4925 @}
4926@}
4927@end group
a1ab1d2a 4928@end smallexample
252b5132 4929
cbd0eecf
L
4930If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4931and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4932automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4933__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4934indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4935respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4936C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4937
252b5132 4938@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4939@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4940@cindex data
4941@cindex section data
4942@cindex output section data
4943@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4944@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4945@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4946@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4947@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4948You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4949@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4950an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4951parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4952value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4953counter.
4954
4955The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4956store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4957bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4958stored.
4959
4960For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4961of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4962@smallexample
4963BYTE(1)
4964LONG(addr)
4965@end smallexample
4966
4967When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4968same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4969target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4970@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4971@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4972
4973If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4974which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4975When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4976true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4977endianness of the first input object file.
4978
36f63dca 4979Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4980between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4981@smallexample
4982SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4983@end smallexample
4984whereas this will work:
4985@smallexample
4986SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4987@end smallexample
4988
252b5132
RH
4989@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4990@cindex holes, filling
4991@cindex unspecified memory
4992You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4993current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4994otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4995gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4996with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4997necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4998point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4999than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
5000different parts of an output section.
5001
5002This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 5003value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 5004@smallexample
563e308f 5005FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
5006@end smallexample
5007
5008The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 5009section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
5010part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5011entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 5012precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 5013expression.
252b5132
RH
5014
5015@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 5016@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
5017There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5018commands.
5019
5020@table @code
5021@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5022@cindex input filename symbols
5023@cindex filename symbols
5024@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5025The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5026The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5027file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5028the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5029
5030This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5031normally used for any other object file format.
5032
5033@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5034@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5035@cindex constructors, arranging in link
5036@item CONSTRUCTORS
5037When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5038unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5039destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5040arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5041automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5042For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5043linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5044@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5045ignored for other object file formats.
5046
5047The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
5048constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5049Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5050the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
5051first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5052of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5053compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5054formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5055@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5056the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5057destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5058@code{exit}.
5059
5060For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5061arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5062addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5063and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5064linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5065runtime code expects to see.
5066
5067@smallexample
5068 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5069 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5070 *(.ctors)
5071 LONG(0)
5072 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5073 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5074 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5075 *(.dtors)
5076 LONG(0)
5077 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5078@end smallexample
5079
5080If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5081which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5082are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5083are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
5084command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5085@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5086@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
5087@samp{*(.dtors)}.
5088
5089Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5090and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5091need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5092scripts.
5093
5094@end table
5095
5096@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 5097@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
5098@cindex discarding sections
5099@cindex sections, discarding
5100@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
5101The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5102This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5103may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 5104@smallexample
49c13adb 5105.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
5106@end smallexample
5107@noindent
5108will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
5109@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5110sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
5111space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5112too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5113space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5114@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5115@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5116This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 5117
a0976ea4 5118The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
5119on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5120symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
5121the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5122section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
5123
5124@cindex /DISCARD/
5125The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5126input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5127section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5128
a2e098c3
NC
5129Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5130discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5131members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5132Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5133
252b5132 5134@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5135@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5136@cindex output section attributes
5137We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5138like this:
0c71d759 5139
252b5132 5140@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5141@group
7e7d5768 5142@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5143 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5144 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5145 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5146 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5147 @{
5148 @var{output-section-command}
5149 @var{output-section-command}
5150 @dots{}
562d3460 5151 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5152@end group
5153@end smallexample
0c71d759 5154
252b5132
RH
5155We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5156@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5157remaining section attributes.
5158
a1ab1d2a 5159@menu
252b5132
RH
5160* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5161* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5162* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5163* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5164* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5165* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5166* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5167* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5168@end menu
5169
5170@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5171@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5172Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5173parentheses. The following types are defined:
5174
5175@table @code
5176@item NOLOAD
5177The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5178loaded into memory when the program is run.
5179@item DSECT
5180@itemx COPY
5181@itemx INFO
5182@itemx OVERLAY
5183These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5184rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5185marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5186section when the program is run.
5187@end table
5188
5189@kindex NOLOAD
5190@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5191@cindex loading, preventing
5192The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5193the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5194the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5195@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5196need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5197@smallexample
5198@group
5199SECTIONS @{
5200 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5201 @dots{}
5202@}
5203@end group
5204@end smallexample
5205
5206@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5207@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5208@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5209@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5210@cindex load address
5211@cindex section load address
5212Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5213@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5214@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5215specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5216address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5217
ea5cae92
NC
5218The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5219specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5220takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5221load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5222region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5223
5224If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5225section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5226load address:
5227
5228@itemize @bullet
5229@item
5230If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5231the LMA address as well.
5232
5233@item
5234If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5235
5236@item
5237Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5238with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5239section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5240VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5241the last section in the located region.
5242
5243@item
5244If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5245that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5246
5247@item
5248If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5249section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5250@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5251
5252@cindex ROM initialized data
5253@cindex initialized data in ROM
5254This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5255example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5256called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5257@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5258even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5259uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5260defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5261counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5262
5263@smallexample
5264@group
5265SECTIONS
5266 @{
5267 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5268 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5269 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5270 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5271 .bss 0x3000 :
5272 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5273@}
5274@end group
5275@end smallexample
5276
5277The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5278this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5279the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5280how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5281script.
5282
5283@smallexample
5284@group
5285extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5286char *src = &_etext;
5287char *dst = &_data;
5288
ea5cae92
NC
5289/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5290while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5291 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5292
ea5cae92 5293/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5294for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5295 *dst = 0;
5296@end group
5297@end smallexample
5298
bbf115d3
L
5299@node Forced Output Alignment
5300@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5301@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5302@cindex forcing output section alignment
5303@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5304You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5305alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5306intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5307
7e7d5768
AM
5308@node Forced Input Alignment
5309@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5310@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5311@cindex forcing input section alignment
5312@cindex input section alignment
5313You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5314SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5315sections, whether larger or smaller.
5316
0c71d759
NC
5317@node Output Section Constraint
5318@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5319@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5320@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5321@cindex constraints on output sections
5322You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5323of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5324read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5325@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5326
252b5132 5327@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5328@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5329@kindex >@var{region}
5330@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5331@cindex memory regions and sections
5332You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5333using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5334
5335Here is a simple example:
5336@smallexample
5337@group
5338MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5339SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5340@end group
5341@end smallexample
5342
5343@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5344@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5345@kindex :@var{phdr}
5346@cindex section, assigning to program header
5347@cindex program headers and sections
5348You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5349using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5350one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5351assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5352@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5353linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5354
5355Here is a simple example:
5356@smallexample
5357@group
5358PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5359SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5360@end group
5361@end smallexample
5362
5363@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5364@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5365@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5366@cindex section fill pattern
5367@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5368You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5369@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5370(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5371within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5372alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5373necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5374of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5375an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5376fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5377other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5378pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5379expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5380
5381You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5382output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5383
5384Here is a simple example:
5385@smallexample
5386@group
563e308f 5387SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5388@end group
5389@end smallexample
5390
5391@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5392@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5393@kindex OVERLAY
5394@cindex overlays
5395An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5396are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5397the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5398copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5399required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5400can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5401than another.
5402
5403Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5404@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5405output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5406command is as follows:
5407@smallexample
5408@group
5409OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5410 @{
5411 @var{secname1}
5412 @{
5413 @var{output-section-command}
5414 @var{output-section-command}
5415 @dots{}
5416 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5417 @var{secname2}
5418 @{
5419 @var{output-section-command}
5420 @var{output-section-command}
5421 @dots{}
5422 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5423 @dots{}
abc9061b 5424 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5425@end group
5426@end smallexample
5427
5428Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5429section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5430section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5431those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5432except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5433sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5434
abc9061b
CC
5435The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5436the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5437
252b5132
RH
5438The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5439addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5440memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5441whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5442and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5443and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5444
56dd11f0
NC
5445If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5446references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5447the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5448sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5450
5451For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5452provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5453defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5454@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5455the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5456within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5457symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5458
5459At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5460the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5461
5462Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5463@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5464@smallexample
5465@group
5466 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5467 @{
5468 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5469 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5470 @}
5471@end group
5472@end smallexample
5473@noindent
5474This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5475address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5476@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5477following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5478@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5479@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5480
5481C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5482like the following.
5483
5484@smallexample
5485@group
5486 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5487 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5488 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5489@end group
5490@end smallexample
5491
5492Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5493everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5494example could have been written identically as follows.
5495
5496@smallexample
5497@group
5498 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5499 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5500 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5501 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5502 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5503 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5504 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5505@end group
5506@end smallexample
5507
5508@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5509@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5510@kindex MEMORY
5511@cindex memory regions
5512@cindex regions of memory
5513@cindex allocating memory
5514@cindex discontinuous memory
5515The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5516memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5517
5518The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5519memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5520may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5521can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5522set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5523regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5524around to fit into the available regions.
5525
127fcdff
AB
5526A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5527however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5528specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5529@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5530@smallexample
5531@group
a1ab1d2a 5532MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5533 @{
5534 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5535 @dots{}
5536 @}
5537@end group
5538@end smallexample
5539
5540The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5541region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5542Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5543with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5544must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5545add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5546command.
252b5132
RH
5547
5548@cindex memory region attributes
5549The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5550whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5551not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5552@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5553section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5554the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5555them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5556
5557The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5558@table @samp
5559@item R
5560Read-only section
5561@item W
5562Read/write section
5563@item X
5564Executable section
5565@item A
5566Allocatable section
5567@item I
5568Initialized section
5569@item L
5570Same as @samp{I}
5571@item !
c09e9a8c 5572Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5573@end table
5574
81c688d5 5575If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5576@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5577attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5578unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5579not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5580string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5581or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5582the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5583
5584@kindex ORIGIN =
5585@kindex o =
5586@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5587The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5588the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5589cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5590abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5591@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5592
5593@kindex LENGTH =
5594@kindex len =
5595@kindex l =
5596The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5597region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5598be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5599@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5600
5601In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5602available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5603and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5604linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5605is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5606or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5607explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5608region.
5609
5610@smallexample
5611@group
a1ab1d2a 5612MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5613 @{
5614 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5615 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5616 @}
5617@end group
5618@end smallexample
5619
5620Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5621specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5622@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5623a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5624output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5625was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5626the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5627output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5628region, the linker will issue an error message.
5629
3ec57632 5630It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5631expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5632@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5633
5634@smallexample
5635@group
c0065db7 5636 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5637@end group
5638@end smallexample
5639
252b5132
RH
5640@node PHDRS
5641@section PHDRS Command
5642@kindex PHDRS
5643@cindex program headers
5644@cindex ELF program headers
5645@cindex program segments
5646@cindex segments, ELF
5647The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5648@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5649loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5650program with the @samp{-p} option.
5651
5652When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5653reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5654program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5655This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5656interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5657
5658The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5659in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5660precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5661the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5662not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5663
5664The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5665generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5666ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5667
5668This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5669@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5670
5671@smallexample
5672@group
5673PHDRS
5674@{
5675 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5676 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5677@}
5678@end group
5679@end smallexample
5680
5681The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5682of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5683header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5684with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5685must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5686is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5687
5688Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5689system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5690specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5691sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5692attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5693Section Phdr}.
5694
5695It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5696merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5697repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5698contain the section.
5699
5700If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5701then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5702not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5703convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5704placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5705default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5706segment at all.
5707
5708@kindex FILEHDR
5709@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5710You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5711the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5712The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5713file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5714include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5715segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5716these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5717
5718The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5719value of the keyword.
5720
5721@table @asis
5722@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5723Indicates an unused program header.
5724
5725@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5726Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5727the file.
5728
5729@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5730Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5731
5732@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5733Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5734found.
5735
5736@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5737Indicates a segment holding note information.
5738
5739@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5740A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5741ABI.
5742
5743@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5744Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5745
1a9ccd70
NC
5746@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5747Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5748
252b5132
RH
5749@item @var{expression}
5750An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5751be used for types not defined above.
5752@end table
5753
5754You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5755in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5756@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5757Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5758output section attribute.
5759
5760The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5761which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5762explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5763an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5764header.
5765
5766Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5767headers used on a native ELF system.
5768
5769@example
5770@group
5771PHDRS
5772@{
5773 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5774 interp PT_INTERP ;
5775 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5776 data PT_LOAD ;
5777 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5778@}
5779
5780SECTIONS
5781@{
5782 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5783 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5784 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5785 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5786 @dots{}
5787 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5788 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5789 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5790 @dots{}
5791@}
5792@end group
5793@end example
5794
5795@node VERSION
5796@section VERSION Command
5797@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5798@cindex symbol versions
5799@cindex version script
5800@cindex versions of symbols
5801The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5802only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5803symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5804a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5805shared library.
5806
5807You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5808you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5809also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5810
5811The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5812@smallexample
5813VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5814@end smallexample
5815
5816The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5817Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5818version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5819version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5820version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5821scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5822library.
5823
5824The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5825examples.
5826
5827@smallexample
5828VERS_1.1 @{
5829 global:
5830 foo1;
5831 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5832 old*;
5833 original*;
5834 new*;
252b5132
RH
5835@};
5836
5837VERS_1.2 @{
5838 foo2;
5839@} VERS_1.1;
5840
5841VERS_2.0 @{
5842 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5843 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5844 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5845 "f(int, double)";
5846 @};
252b5132
RH
5847@} VERS_1.2;
5848@end smallexample
5849
5850This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5851version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5852The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5853a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5854of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5855symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5856is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5857in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5858However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5859name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5860
5861Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5862depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5863to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5864
5865Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5866depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5867and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5868
5869When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5870specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5871unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5872unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5873somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5874wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5875wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5876set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5877ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5878
5879The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5880they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5881could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5882However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5883
0f6bf451 5884Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5885in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5886symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5887won't.
5888
5889@smallexample
7c9c73be 5890@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5891@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5892
252b5132
RH
5893When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5894symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5895requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5896shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5897loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5898linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5899application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5900way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5901all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5902search for each symbol reference.
5903
5904The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5905doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5906that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5907functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5908the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5909required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5910that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5911versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5912the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5913
5914There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5915first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5916source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5917script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5918maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5919@smallexample
5920__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5921@end smallexample
5922@noindent
5923in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5924be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5925The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5926@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5927takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5928
5929The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5930function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5931an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5932version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5933linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5934
5935To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5936source file. Here is an example:
5937
5938@smallexample
5939__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5940__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5941__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5942__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5943@end smallexample
5944
5945In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5946unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5947example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5948@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5949
5950When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5951some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5952this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5953@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5954declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5955you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5956
5957If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5958within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5959(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5960specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5961
cb840a31
L
5962You can also specify the language in the version script:
5963
5964@smallexample
5965VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5966@end smallexample
5967
c0065db7 5968The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5969The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5970demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5971patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5972@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5973
86043bbb
MM
5974Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5975described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5976or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5977the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5978whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5979cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5980might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5981should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5982expect when you upgrade.
5983
252b5132
RH
5984@node Expressions
5985@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5986@cindex expressions
5987@cindex arithmetic
5988The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5989that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5990expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5991host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5992
5993You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5994
5995The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5996expressions.
5997
5998@menu
5999* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 6000* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 6001* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 6002* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
6003* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6004* Operators:: Operators
6005* Evaluation:: Evaluation
6006* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6007* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6008@end menu
6009
6010@node Constants
6011@subsection Constants
6012@cindex integer notation
6013@cindex constants in linker scripts
6014All constants are integers.
6015
6016As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6017octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 6018hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 6019@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
6020@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6021value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
6022
6023@cindex scaled integers
6024@cindex K and M integer suffixes
6025@cindex M and K integer suffixes
6026@cindex suffixes for integers
6027@cindex integer suffixes
6028In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6029constant by
6030@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6031@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6032@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6033@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6034@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6035@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6036@tex
6037${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6038@end tex
6039@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
6040respectively. For example, the following
6041all refer to the same quantity:
6042
252b5132 6043@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6044_fourk_1 = 4K;
6045_fourk_2 = 4096;
6046_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 6047_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
6048@end smallexample
6049
8a308ae8
NC
6050Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6051conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6052
0c71d759
NC
6053@node Symbolic Constants
6054@subsection Symbolic Constants
6055@cindex symbolic constants
6056@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 6057It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
6058the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6059
6060@table @code
6061@item MAXPAGESIZE
6062@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6063The target's maximum page size.
6064
6065@item COMMONPAGESIZE
6066@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6067The target's default page size.
6068@end table
6069
6070So for example:
6071
6072@smallexample
9d5777a3 6073 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
6074@end smallexample
6075
6076will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6077supported by the target.
6078
252b5132
RH
6079@node Symbols
6080@subsection Symbol Names
6081@cindex symbol names
6082@cindex names
6083@cindex quoted symbol names
6084@kindex "
6085Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6086and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6087Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6088specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6089keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6090@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6091"SECTION" = 9;
6092"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
6093@end smallexample
6094
6095Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6096to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6097whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6098
ecca9871
L
6099@node Orphan Sections
6100@subsection Orphan Sections
6101@cindex orphan
6102Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6103are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6104script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
6105output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6106in which to place the orphaned input section.
6107
6108If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6109an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6110placed at the end of that output section.
6111
6112If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6113sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6114name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6115orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6116one new output section.
6117
6118If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6119then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
6120in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6121linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6122attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6123sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6124support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 6125
a05a5b64
TP
6126The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6127(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
6128output sections an orphan is placed in.
6129
252b5132
RH
6130@node Location Counter
6131@subsection The Location Counter
6132@kindex .
6133@cindex dot
6134@cindex location counter
6135@cindex current output location
6136The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6137current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6138location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6139within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6140anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6141
6142@cindex holes
6143Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6144moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6145location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6146and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6147doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6148
6149@smallexample
6150SECTIONS
6151@{
6152 output :
6153 @{
6154 file1(.text)
6155 . = . + 1000;
6156 file2(.text)
6157 . += 1000;
6158 file3(.text)
563e308f 6159 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6160@}
6161@end smallexample
6162@noindent
6163In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6164located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6165followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6166@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6167@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6168specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6169
5c6bbab8
NC
6170@cindex dot inside sections
6171Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6172current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6173statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6174absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6175however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6176not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6177
6178@smallexample
6179SECTIONS
6180@{
6181 . = 0x100
6182 .text: @{
6183 *(.text)
6184 . = 0x200
6185 @}
6186 . = 0x500
6187 .data: @{
6188 *(.data)
6189 . += 0x600
6190 @}
6191@}
6192@end smallexample
6193
6194The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6195and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6196the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6197much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6198move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6199and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6200the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6201the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6202
b5666f2f
AM
6203@cindex dot outside sections
6204Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6205output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6206needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6207
6208@smallexample
6209SECTIONS
6210@{
6211 start_of_text = . ;
6212 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6213 end_of_text = . ;
6214
6215 start_of_data = . ;
6216 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6217 end_of_data = . ;
6218@}
6219@end smallexample
6220
6221If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6222not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6223between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6224should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6225blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6226the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6227sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6228statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6229special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6230place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6231as follows:
6232
6233@smallexample
6234SECTIONS
6235@{
6236 start_of_text = . ;
6237 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6238 end_of_text = . ;
6239
6240 start_of_data = . ;
6241 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6242 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6243 end_of_data = . ;
6244@}
6245@end smallexample
6246
6247This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6248@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6249placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6250assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6251a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6252section. So you could write:
6253
6254@smallexample
6255SECTIONS
6256@{
6257 start_of_text = . ;
6258 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6259 end_of_text = . ;
6260
6261 . = . ;
6262 start_of_data = . ;
6263 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6264 end_of_data = . ;
6265@}
6266@end smallexample
6267
6268Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6269@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6270
252b5132
RH
6271@need 2000
6272@node Operators
6273@subsection Operators
6274@cindex operators for arithmetic
6275@cindex arithmetic operators
6276@cindex precedence in expressions
6277The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6278the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6279@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6280@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6281@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6282@smallexample
6283precedence associativity Operators Notes
6284(highest)
62851 left ! - ~ (1)
62862 left * / %
62873 left + -
62884 left >> <<
62895 left == != > < <= >=
62906 left &
62917 left |
62928 left &&
62939 left ||
629410 right ? :
629511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6296(lowest)
6297@end smallexample
6298Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6299(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6300(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6301@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6302@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6303@tex
6304\vskip \baselineskip
6305%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6306\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6307\hrule
6308\halign
6309{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6310height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6311&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6312height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6313\noalign{\hrule}
6314height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6315&highest&&&&&\cr
6316% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6317&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6318&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6319&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6320&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6321&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6322&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6323&7&&left&&|&\cr
6324&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6325&9&&left&&||&\cr
6326&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6327&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6328&lowest&&&&&\cr
6329height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6330\hrule}
6331@end tex
6332@iftex
6333{
6334@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6335@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6336@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6337}
6338@end iftex
6339@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6340
6341@node Evaluation
6342@subsection Evaluation
6343@cindex lazy evaluation
6344@cindex expression evaluation order
6345The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6346an expression when absolutely necessary.
6347
6348The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6349address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6350regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6351as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6352
6353However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6354until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6355other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6356for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6357
6358The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6359assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6360allocation.
6361
6362Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6363@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6364
6365If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6366available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6367following
6368@smallexample
6369@group
6370SECTIONS
6371 @{
a1ab1d2a 6372 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6373 @{ *(.text) @}
6374 @}
6375@end group
6376@end smallexample
6377@noindent
6378will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6379address}.
6380
6381@node Expression Section
6382@subsection The Section of an Expression
6383@cindex expression sections
6384@cindex absolute expressions
6385@cindex relative expressions
6386@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6387@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6388@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6389Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6390relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6391using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6392value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6393symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6394operations.
6395
abf4be64
AM
6396Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6397section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6398address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6399@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6400functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6401One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6402(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6403differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6404versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6405section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6406Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6407absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6408given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6409everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6410
6411In the following simple example,
252b5132 6412
7542af2a
AM
6413@smallexample
6414@group
6415SECTIONS
6416 @{
6417 . = 0x100;
6418 __executable_start = 0x100;
6419 .data :
6420 @{
6421 . = 0x10;
6422 __data_start = 0x10;
6423 *(.data)
6424 @}
6425 @dots{}
6426 @}
6427@end group
6428@end smallexample
252b5132 6429
7542af2a
AM
6430both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6431address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6432@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6433section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6434
5c3049d2
AM
6435For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6436addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6437
6438@itemize @bullet
6439@item
c05f749e
AM
6440Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6441operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6442absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6443@item
7542af2a
AM
6444Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6445relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6446and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6447@item
c05f749e
AM
6448Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6449in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6450address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6451before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6452@end itemize
6453
6454The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6455
6456@itemize @bullet
6457@item
6458An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6459@item
6460The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6461@item
9bc8bb33 6462The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6463relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6464(after above conversions) is also a number when
6465@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6466but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6467@item
6468The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6469relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6470section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6471@item
6472The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6473conversions) is an absolute address.
6474@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6475
6476You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6477to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6478create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6479section @samp{.data}:
6480@smallexample
6481SECTIONS
6482 @{
6483 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6484 @}
6485@end smallexample
6486@noindent
6487If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6488@samp{.data} section.
6489
7542af2a
AM
6490Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6491particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6492
252b5132
RH
6493@node Builtin Functions
6494@subsection Builtin Functions
6495@cindex functions in expressions
6496The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6497use in linker script expressions.
6498
6499@table @code
6500@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6501@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6502@cindex expression, absolute
6503Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6504of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6505value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6506normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6507
6508@item ADDR(@var{section})
6509@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6510@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6511Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6512script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6513the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6514@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6515@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6516the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6517@smallexample
6518@group
6519SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6520 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6521 @{
252b5132
RH
6522 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6523 @dots{}
6524 @}
6525 .output :
6526 @{
6527 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6528 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6529 @}
6530@dots{} @}
6531@end group
6532@end smallexample
6533
876f4090
NS
6534@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6535@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6536@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6537@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6538@cindex round up location counter
6539@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6540@cindex round up expression
6541@cindex align expression
6542Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6543to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6544doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6545arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6546expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6547equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6548
6549Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6550next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6551variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6552input sections:
252b5132
RH
6553@smallexample
6554@group
6555SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6556 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6557 *(.data)
6558 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6559 @}
6560@dots{} @}
6561@end group
6562@end smallexample
6563@noindent
6564The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6565a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6566a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6567of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6568
6569The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6570
362c1d1a
NS
6571@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6572@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6573@cindex section alignment
6574Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6575been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6576evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6577the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6578value in that section.
6579@smallexample
6580@group
6581SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6582 .output @{
6583 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6584 @dots{}
6585 @}
6586@dots{} @}
6587@end group
6588@end smallexample
6589
252b5132
RH
6590@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6591@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6592This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6593scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6594section.
6595
2d20f7bf
JJ
6596@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6597@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6598This is equivalent to either
6599@smallexample
6600(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6601@end smallexample
6602or
6603@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6604(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6605 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6606@end smallexample
6607@noindent
6608depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6609for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6610@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6611If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6612memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6613bytes in the on-disk file.
6614
6615This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6616any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6617@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6618be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6619running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6620that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6621page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6622
6623@noindent
6624Example:
6625@smallexample
6626 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6627@end smallexample
6628
6629@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6630@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6631This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6632evaluation purposes.
6633
6634@smallexample
6635 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6636@end smallexample
6637
a4f5ad88
JJ
6638@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6639@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6640This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6641@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6642When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6643does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6644@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6645argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6646script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6647@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6648padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6649section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6650
6651@smallexample
6652 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6653@end smallexample
6654
252b5132
RH
6655@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6656@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6657@cindex symbol defaults
6658Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6659defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6660return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6661default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6662shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6663the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6664existed, its value is preserved:
6665
6666@smallexample
6667@group
6668SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6669 .text : @{
6670 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6671 @dots{}
6672 @}
6673 @dots{}
6674@}
6675@end group
6676@end smallexample
6677
3ec57632
NC
6678@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6679@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6680Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6681
252b5132
RH
6682@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6683@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6684@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6685Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6686Section LMA}).
6687
2e53f7d6
NC
6688@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6689@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6690Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6691@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6692
252b5132
RH
6693@kindex MAX
6694@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6695Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6696
6697@kindex MIN
6698@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6699Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6700
6701@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6702@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6703@cindex unallocated address, next
6704Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6705This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6706use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6707output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6708
3ec57632
NC
6709@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6710@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6711Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6712
ba916c8a
MM
6713@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6714@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6715Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6716value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6717@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6718will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6719can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6720``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6721name.
6722
252b5132
RH
6723@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6724@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6725@cindex section size
6726Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6727been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6728evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6729@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6730@smallexample
6731@group
6732SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6733 .output @{
6734 .start = . ;
6735 @dots{}
6736 .end = . ;
6737 @}
6738 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6739 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6740@dots{} @}
6741@end group
6742@end smallexample
6743
6744@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6745@itemx sizeof_headers
6746@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6747@cindex header size
6748Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6749information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6750this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6751choose, to facilitate paging.
6752
6753@cindex not enough room for program headers
6754@cindex program headers, not enough room
6755When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6756@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6757number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6758addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6759additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6760room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6761the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6762script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6763you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6764command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6765@end table
6766
6767@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6768@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6769@cindex implicit linker scripts
6770If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6771an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6772linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6773linker will report an error.
6774
6775An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6776
6777Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6778assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6779commands.
6780
6781Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6782at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6783read. This can affect archive searching.
6784
6785@ifset GENERIC
6786@node Machine Dependent
6787@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6788
6789@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6790@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6791sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6792functionality are not listed.
6793
6794@menu
36f63dca
NC
6795@ifset H8300
6796* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6797@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6798@ifset M68HC11
6799* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6800@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6801@ifset ARM
6802* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6803@end ifset
6804@ifset HPPA
6805* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6806@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6807@ifset M68K
6808* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6809@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6810@ifset MIPS
6811* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6812@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6813@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6814* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6815@end ifset
2469cfa2 6816@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6817* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6818@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6819@ifset NDS32
6820* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6821@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6822@ifset NIOSII
6823* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6824@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6825@ifset POWERPC
6826* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6827@end ifset
6828@ifset POWERPC64
6829* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6830@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6831@ifset S/390
6832* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6833@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6834@ifset SPU
6835* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6836@end ifset
74459f0e 6837@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6838* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6839@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6840@ifset WIN32
6841* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6842@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6843@ifset XTENSA
6844* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6845@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6846@end menu
6847@end ifset
6848
252b5132
RH
6849@ifset H8300
6850@ifclear GENERIC
6851@raisesections
6852@end ifclear
6853
6854@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6855@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6856
6857@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6858For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6859you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6860
6861@table @emph
6862@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6863@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6864@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6865targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6866program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6867respectively.
6868
6869@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6870@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6871@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6872@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6873sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6874page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6875(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6876@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6877top page of memory).
1502569c 6878
81f5558e
NC
6879@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6880indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6881displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6882the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6883@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6884whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6885range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6886
1502569c 6887@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6888@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6889biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6890which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6891page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6892(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6893@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6894the top page of memory).
6895
6896@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6897@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
689832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6899changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6900(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6901@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6902the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6903@end table
6904
6905@ifclear GENERIC
6906@lowersections
6907@end ifclear
6908@end ifset
6909
36f63dca 6910@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6911@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6912@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6913@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6914@node Renesas
6915@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6916
c2dcd04e
NC
6917@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6918H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6919options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6920@end ifset
6921@end ifclear
6922
36f63dca
NC
6923@ifset ARM
6924@ifclear GENERIC
6925@raisesections
6926@end ifclear
6927
93fd0973
SC
6928@ifset M68HC11
6929@ifclear GENERIC
6930@raisesections
6931@end ifclear
6932
6933@node M68HC11/68HC12
6934@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6935
6936@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6937
6938@subsection Linker Relaxation
6939
6940For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6941optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6942
6943@table @emph
6944@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6945@item relaxing address modes
6946@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6947targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6948program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6949respectively.
6950
6951@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6952transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6953page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6954
6955@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6956When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6957of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6958addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6959@code{bset} instructions.
6960
6961@end table
6962
6963@subsection Trampoline Generation
6964
6965@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6966@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6967For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6968call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6969will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6970trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6971case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6972point to the function trampoline.
6973
6974@ifclear GENERIC
6975@lowersections
6976@end ifclear
6977@end ifset
6978
36f63dca 6979@node ARM
3674e28a 6980@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6981
6982@cindex ARM interworking support
6983@kindex --support-old-code
6984For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6985between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6986been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6987line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6988libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6989option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6990given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6991which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6992the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6993non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6994
6995@cindex thumb entry point
6996@cindex entry point, thumb
6997@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6998The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6999@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
7000But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
7001branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
7002executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7003
ce11ba6c
KT
7004@cindex PE import table prefixing
7005@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7006The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7007the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 7008element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
7009import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7010
e489d0ae
PB
7011@cindex BE8
7012@kindex --be8
7013The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
7014executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7015objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7016option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7017little-endian code.
e489d0ae 7018
3674e28a
PB
7019@cindex TARGET1
7020@kindex --target1-rel
7021@kindex --target1-abs
7022The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7023@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7024or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7025and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7026
7027@cindex TARGET2
7028@kindex --target2=@var{type}
7029The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7030@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7031meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7032@table @samp
7033@item rel
eeac373a
PB
7034@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7035@item abs
7036@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
7037@item got-rel
7038@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7039@end table
7040
319850b4
JB
7041@cindex FIX_V4BX
7042@kindex --fix-v4bx
7043The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7044specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7045interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7046also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7047
7048In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7049linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7050@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7051
7052In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7053relocations are ignored.
7054
845b51d6
PB
7055@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7056@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7057Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7058relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7059
7060@smallexample
7061TST rM, #1
7062MOVEQ PC, rM
7063BX Rn
7064@end smallexample
7065
7066This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7067and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 7068condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 7069
33bfe774
JB
7070@cindex USE_BLX
7071@kindex --use-blx
7072The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7073BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7074situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7075code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7076each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7077
7078This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7079specify it if you are using that target.
7080
c6dd86c6
JB
7081@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7082@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7083The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7084bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7085instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7086to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7087the support code can read the intended values.
7088
7089The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7090intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7091and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7092intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7093full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7094you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7095
7096If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7097enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7098@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7099mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7100vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7101@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7102
7103If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7104potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7105such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7106first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7107instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7108the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7109are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7110
2de70689
MGD
7111@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7112@kindex --fix-arm1176
7113@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
7114The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7115in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7116are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
7117unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7118
9d5777a3 7119Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 7120Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
7121http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7122
a504d23a
LA
7123@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7124@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7125
7126The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7127workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7128the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7129off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7130the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7131core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7132integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7133VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7134
7135The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7136necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7137
7138The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7139@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7140STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7141linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7142@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7143
7144If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7145potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7146such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7147replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7148branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7149then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7150
7151The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7152the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7153
7154The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7155they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7156there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7157occurs.
7158
7159The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7160PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7161large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7162cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7163occurs.
7164
bf21ed78
MS
7165@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7166@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7167The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7168warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7169enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7170linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7171using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7172not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7173
7174@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7175@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7176The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7177warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7178@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7179linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7180using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7181
726150b7
NC
7182@cindex PIC_VENEER
7183@kindex --pic-veneer
7184The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7185ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7186is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7187@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7188
7189@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7190@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7191The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7192code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7193perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7194placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7195controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7196The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7197duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7198group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7199code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7200where they should be placed.
7201
7202The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7203@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7204placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7205branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7206placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7207value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7208exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7209A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7210linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7211from the input sections.
7212
7213The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7214@samp{N = +1}.
7215
1a51c1a4
NC
7216Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7217only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7218otherwise.
7219
1db37fe6
YG
7220@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7221@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7222@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7223The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7224
7225The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7226
68fcca92
JW
7227@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7228@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7229@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7230The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7231
7232Please contact ARM for further details.
7233
1db37fe6
YG
7234@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7235@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7236@cindex Merging exidx entries
7237The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7238
7239@kindex --long-plt
7240@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7241The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7242which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7243entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7244
1f56df9d
JW
7245@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7246@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7247The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7248link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7249
4ba2ef8f
TP
7250@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7251All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7252Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7253@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7254veneers in memory.
7255
54ddd295
TP
7256@kindex --cmse-implib
7257@cindex Secure gateway import library
7258The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7259specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7260secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7261executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7262
0955507f
TP
7263@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7264@cindex Input import library
7265The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7266must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7267given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7268in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7269@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7270library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7271library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7272for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7273specified.
7274
36f63dca
NC
7275@ifclear GENERIC
7276@lowersections
7277@end ifclear
7278@end ifset
7279
7280@ifset HPPA
7281@ifclear GENERIC
7282@raisesections
7283@end ifclear
7284
7285@node HPPA ELF32
7286@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7287@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7288@kindex --multi-subspace
7289When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7290import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7291The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7292stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7293multiple sub-spaces.
7294
7295@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7296@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7297Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7298stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7299@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7300sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7301a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7302the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7303conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7304prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7305A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7306branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7307@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7308@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7309detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7310positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7311
7312Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7313single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7314create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7315large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7316
7317@ifclear GENERIC
7318@lowersections
7319@end ifclear
7320@end ifset
7321
7fb9f789
NC
7322@ifset M68K
7323@ifclear GENERIC
7324@raisesections
7325@end ifclear
7326
7327@node M68K
7328@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7329
7330@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7331@kindex --got=@var{type}
7332The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7333The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7334@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7335the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7336@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7337entries only at non-negative offsets.
7338@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7339entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7340support such GOTs.
7341@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7342output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7343file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7344files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7345
7346@ifclear GENERIC
7347@lowersections
7348@end ifclear
7349@end ifset
7350
833794fc
MR
7351@ifset MIPS
7352@ifclear GENERIC
7353@raisesections
7354@end ifclear
7355
7356@node MIPS
7357@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7358
7359@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7360@kindex --insn32
7361@kindex --no-insn32
7362The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7363microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7364in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7365used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7366or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7367including 16-bit ones where possible.
7368
8b10b0b3
MR
7369@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7370@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7371@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7372The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7373control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7374@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7375relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7376calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7377relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7378instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7379or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7380the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7381
833794fc
MR
7382@ifclear GENERIC
7383@lowersections
7384@end ifclear
7385@end ifset
7386
36f63dca
NC
7387@ifset MMIX
7388@ifclear GENERIC
7389@raisesections
7390@end ifclear
7391
7392@node MMIX
7393@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7394For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7395@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7396understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7397can translate between the two formats.
7398
7399There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7400Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7401registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7402equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7403@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7404global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7405this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7406symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7407
7a2de473
HPN
7408Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7409@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7410The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7411of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7412
7413Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7414are left out from an mmo file.
7415
7416@ifclear GENERIC
7417@lowersections
7418@end ifclear
7419@end ifset
7420
7421@ifset MSP430
7422@ifclear GENERIC
7423@raisesections
7424@end ifclear
7425
7426@node MSP430
7427@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7428For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7429will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7430just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7431
7432@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7433The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7434
7435@table @code
7436@item @samp{.vectors}
7437Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7438
7439@item @samp{.bootloader}
7440Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7441in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7442
7443@item @samp{.infomem}
7444Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7445this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7446
c0065db7 7447@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7448This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7449in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7450
7451@item @samp{.noinit}
7452Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7453
c0065db7 7454The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7455@end table
7456
7ef3addb
JL
7457@table @option
7458@cindex MSP430 Options
7459@kindex --code-region
7460@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7461This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7462argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7463using this option.
7464
7465@kindex --data-region
7466@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7467This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7468[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7469for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7470
7471@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7472@item --disable-sec-transformation
7473Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7474and @code{--data-region} options.
7475This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7476wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7477not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7478@end table
7479
36f63dca
NC
7480@ifclear GENERIC
7481@lowersections
7482@end ifclear
7483@end ifset
7484
35c08157
KLC
7485@ifset NDS32
7486@ifclear GENERIC
7487@raisesections
7488@end ifclear
7489
7490@node NDS32
7491@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7492@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7493For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7494relaxes objects according to these options.
7495
7496@table @code
7497@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7498Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7499
7500@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7501Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7502
7503@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7504Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7505
7506@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7507Export the EX9 table after linking.
7508
7509@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7510Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7511
7512@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7513Update the existing EX9 table.
7514
7515@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7516Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7517
7518@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7519Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7520
7521@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7522Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7523
7524@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7525Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7526@end table
7527
7528@ifclear GENERIC
7529@lowersections
7530@end ifclear
7531@end ifset
7532
78058a5e
SL
7533@ifset NIOSII
7534@ifclear GENERIC
7535@raisesections
7536@end ifclear
7537
7538@node Nios II
7539@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7540@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7541@kindex --relax on Nios II
7542
7543Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7544transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7545which may result in @command{ld} giving
7546@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7547The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7548trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7549outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7550trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7551be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7552larger than 256MB.
7553
7554The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7555is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7556@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7557locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7558source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7559register as a temporary.
7560
7561Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7562relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7563option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7564
7565@ifclear GENERIC
7566@lowersections
7567@end ifclear
7568@end ifset
7569
2a60a7a8
AM
7570@ifset POWERPC
7571@ifclear GENERIC
7572@raisesections
7573@end ifclear
7574
7575@node PowerPC ELF32
7576@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7577@cindex PowerPC long branches
7578@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7579Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7580displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7581@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7582@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7583the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7584section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7585section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7586@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7587both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7588considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7589
7590@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7591@table @option
7592@cindex PowerPC PLT
7593@kindex --bss-plt
7594@item --bss-plt
7595Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7596generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7597the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7598writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7599@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7600PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7601compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7602BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7603
016687f8
AM
7604@kindex --secure-plt
7605@item --secure-plt
7606@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7607@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7608when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7609layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7610style BSS PLT.
7611
2a60a7a8
AM
7612@cindex PowerPC GOT
7613@kindex --sdata-got
7614@item --sdata-got
7615The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7616sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7617@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7618section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7619@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7620@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7621@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7622@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7623PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7624pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7625GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7626really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7627
7628@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7629@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7630@item --emit-stub-syms
7631This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7632symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7633
7634@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7635@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7636@item --no-tls-optimize
7637PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7638sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7639disable the optimization.
7640@end table
7641
7642@ifclear GENERIC
7643@lowersections
7644@end ifclear
7645@end ifset
7646
7647@ifset POWERPC64
7648@ifclear GENERIC
7649@raisesections
7650@end ifclear
7651
7652@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7653@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7654
7655@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7656@table @option
7657@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7658@kindex --stub-group-size
7659@item --stub-group-size
7660Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7661by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7662@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7663sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7664a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7665the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7666conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7667prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7668A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7669branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7670@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7671@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7672detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7673positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7674
7675Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7676single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7677create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7678large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7679
7680@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7681@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7682@item --emit-stub-syms
7683This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7684symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7685
7686@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7687@kindex --dotsyms
7688@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7689@item --dotsyms
7690@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7691These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7692in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7693function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7694code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7695properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7696to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7697@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7698dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7699feature.
7700
7ae4ea7d
AM
7701@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7702@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7703@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7704@item --save-restore-funcs
7705@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7706These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7707provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7708@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7709function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7710link.
7711
2a60a7a8
AM
7712@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7713@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7714@item --no-tls-optimize
7715PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7716sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7717disable the optimization.
7718
7c9cf415
AM
7719@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7720@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7721@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa
AM
7722@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7723@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
95421fb9
AM
7724@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7725@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa 7726These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7c9cf415
AM
7727stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7728an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7729@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
9e7028aa
AM
7730stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7731generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7732__tls_get_addr_opt.
7733Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7734much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7735an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7736will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7737@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7738and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7739this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7740Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
5cebc931 7741@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
9e7028aa 7742register saves.
7c9cf415 7743
2a60a7a8
AM
7744@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7745@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7746@item --no-opd-optimize
7747PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7748corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7749the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7750Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7751
7752@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7753@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7754@item --non-overlapping-opd
7755Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7756@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7757the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7758entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7759
7760@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7761@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7762@item --no-toc-optimize
7763PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7764entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7765reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7766marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7767marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7768relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7769unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7770reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7771discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7772reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7773code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7774optimization.
7775
7776@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7777@kindex --no-multi-toc
7778@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7779If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7780@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7781where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7782entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7783total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7784grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7785TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7786calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7787help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
778864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7789Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7790
7791@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7792@kindex --no-toc-sort
7793@item --no-toc-sort
7794By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7795happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7796placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7797with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7798referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7799@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7800results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7801off this feature.
7802
7803@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7804@kindex --plt-align
7805@kindex --no-plt-align
7806@item --plt-align
7807@itemx --no-plt-align
7808Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7809aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7810boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7811specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7812specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7813if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7814PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7815
7816@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7817@kindex --plt-static-chain
7818@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7819@item --plt-static-chain
7820@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7821Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7822chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7823chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7824
7825@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7826@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7827@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7828@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7829@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7830With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7831lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7832another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7833order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7834memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7835barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7836looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7837seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7838default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7839
7840@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7841@kindex --plt-localentry
7842@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7843@item --plt-localentry
7844@itemx --no-localentry
7845ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7846ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7847(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7848Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7849or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7850functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7851in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7852interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7853including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7854to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7855complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7856care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7857@end table
7858
7859@ifclear GENERIC
7860@lowersections
7861@end ifclear
7862@end ifset
7863
b4cbbe8f
AK
7864@ifset S/390
7865@ifclear GENERIC
7866@raisesections
7867@end ifclear
7868
7869@node S/390 ELF
7870@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7871
7872@cindex S/390 ELF options
7873@table @option
7874
7875@cindex S/390
7876@kindex --s390-pgste
7877@item --s390-pgste
7878This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7879segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7880binaries marked that way.
7881@end table
7882
7883@ifclear GENERIC
7884@lowersections
7885@end ifclear
7886@end ifset
7887
49fa1e15
AM
7888@ifset SPU
7889@ifclear GENERIC
7890@raisesections
7891@end ifclear
7892
7893@node SPU ELF
7894@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7895
7896@cindex SPU ELF options
7897@table @option
7898
7899@cindex SPU plugins
7900@kindex --plugin
7901@item --plugin
7902This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7903
7904@cindex SPU overlays
7905@kindex --no-overlays
7906@item --no-overlays
7907Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7908regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7909@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7910turns off all this special overlay handling.
7911
7912@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7913@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7914@item --emit-stub-syms
7915This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7916symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7917
7918@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7919@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7920@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7921This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7922function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7923on calls to non-overlay regions.
7924
7925@cindex SPU local store size
7926@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7927@item --local-store=lo:hi
7928@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7929the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7930range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7931
c0065db7 7932@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7933@kindex --stack-analysis
7934@item --stack-analysis
7935SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7936unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7937under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7938@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7939@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7940determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7941for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7942for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7943for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7944find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7945and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7946under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7947dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7948is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7949and calls will be given.
7950
c0065db7 7951@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7952@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7953@item --emit-stack-syms
7954This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7955in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7956These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7957functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7958functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7959such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7960The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7961@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7962@end table
7963
7964@ifclear GENERIC
7965@lowersections
7966@end ifclear
7967@end ifset
7968
36f63dca
NC
7969@ifset TICOFF
7970@ifclear GENERIC
7971@raisesections
7972@end ifclear
7973
7974@node TI COFF
7975@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7976@cindex TI COFF versions
7977@kindex --format=@var{version}
7978The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7979TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7980also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7981format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7982header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7983
7984@ifclear GENERIC
7985@lowersections
7986@end ifclear
7987@end ifset
7988
2ca22b03
NC
7989@ifset WIN32
7990@ifclear GENERIC
7991@raisesections
7992@end ifclear
7993
7994@node WIN32
7995@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7996
c0065db7 7997This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7998See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7999command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
8000
8001@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8002@cindex import libraries
8003@item import libraries
69da35b5 8004The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 8005libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
8006regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8007archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 8008support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 8009@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 8010
c0065db7
RM
8011@item exporting DLL symbols
8012@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
8013The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8014
8015@table @emph
8016@item using auto-export functionality
8017@cindex using auto-export functionality
8018By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 8019which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 8020
0a5d968e
NC
8021@itemize
8022@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8023@item --exclude-symbols
8024@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 8025@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 8026@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
8027@end itemize
8028
09e2aba4
DK
8029When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8030(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8031symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8032often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8033private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 8034options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
8035exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8036final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8037
8038If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
8039command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8040if either of the following are true:
8041
8042@itemize
8043@item A DEF file is used.
8044@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8045@end itemize
dc8465bf 8046
c0065db7
RM
8047@item using a DEF file
8048@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
8049Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8050an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8051exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8052name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 8053command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
8054
8055@example
8056gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8057@end example
8058
0a5d968e
NC
8059Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8060@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8061
dc8465bf
NC
8062Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8063
8064@example
4b5bd4e7 8065LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
8066
8067EXPORTS
8068foo
8069bar
8070_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
8071another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8072var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
8073doo = foo == foo2
8074eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 8075@end example
dc8465bf 8076
7fcab871 8077This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
8078symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8079alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8080by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8081@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
8082@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8083export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8084in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8085symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 8086
6b31ad16
DS
8087The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8088name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8089the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8090
b45619c0
NC
8091When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8092library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 8093@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 8094executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
8095
8096With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8097specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 8098non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
8099
8100If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
8101or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8102filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 8103
4b5bd4e7
DS
8104The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8105
8106@example
8107EXPORTS
8108 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8109 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 8110 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 8111@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
8112
8113Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8114@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8115@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8116@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8117Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
8118@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8119string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
8120
8121The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8122
8123@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8124will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8125by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8126linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8127library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8128
8129@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8130The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8131the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8132@code{*_imp__foo}).
8133
8134@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8135well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8136read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8137variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8138the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8139extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8140application will behave unexpectedly.
8141
8142@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8143it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8144symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8145API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8146the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8147
4b5bd4e7
DS
8148See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8149other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8150
8151@cindex creating a DEF file
8152While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8153with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8154
8155@item Using decorations
8156@cindex Using decorations
8157Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8158itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8159declared as:
8160
8161@example
8162__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8163__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8164@end example
8165
8166All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8167any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8168this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8169the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8170
8171Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8172decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8173instead:
8174
8175@example
8176__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8177__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8178@end example
8179
c0065db7
RM
8180This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8181when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8182variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8183code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8184of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8185omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8186@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8187information.
c0065db7 8188@end table
dc8465bf 8189
2ca22b03
NC
8190@cindex automatic data imports
8191@item automatic data imports
8192The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8193by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8194compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8195issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8196code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8197c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8198initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8199decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8200platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8201command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8202The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8203suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8204trigger the feature's use.
8205
c0065db7 8206auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8207additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8208
c0065db7 8209"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8210documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8211
c0065db7
RM
8212The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8213occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8214One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8215below.
8216
8217@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8218For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8219object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8220offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8221field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8222in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8223without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8224The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8225references.
8226
c0065db7
RM
8227The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8228be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8229themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8230runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8231compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8232support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8233run without error on an older system.
8234
c0065db7
RM
8235@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8236enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8237
8238@cindex direct linking to a dll
8239@item direct linking to a dll
8240The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8241including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8242libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8243traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8244libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8245function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8246though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8247storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8248tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8249large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8250
c0065db7 8251Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8252@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8253of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8254perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8255select the dll instead of an import library.
8256
2ca22b03 8257
69da35b5
NC
8258For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8259to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8260
8261@example
45e948fe
NC
8262libxxx.dll.a
8263xxx.dll.a
8264libxxx.a
8265xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8266libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8267cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8268libxxx.dll
8269xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8270@end example
8271
69da35b5
NC
8272before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8273
c0065db7
RM
8274(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8275where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8276@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8277file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8278@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8279
c0065db7
RM
8280Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8281@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8282was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8283various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8284could coexist on the same machine.
8285
2ca22b03
NC
8286The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8287applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8288libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8289
8290@example
8291bin/
8292 cygxxx.dll
8293lib/
8294 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8295 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8296@end example
8297
c0065db7
RM
8298Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8299done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8300
83011. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8302@example
8303gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8304@end example
2ca22b03 8305
69da35b5
NC
8306However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8307(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8308@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8309not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8310
2ca22b03
NC
83112. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8312directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8313should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8314making the app/dll.
8315
8316@example
8317ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8318@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8319
8320Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8321
8322@example
8323gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8324@end example
69da35b5
NC
8325
8326This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8327perfectly legal
8328
8329@example
8330bin/
8331 cygxxx-5.dll
8332lib/
c0065db7 8333 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8334@end example
8335
dc8465bf 8336Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8337even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8338@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8339
8340Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8341wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8342
83431. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8344work with auto-imported data.
8345
dc8465bf
NC
83462. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8347import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8348symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8349for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8350possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8351
45e948fe
NC
83523. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8353critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8354in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8355stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8356
69da35b5 8357So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8358true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8359a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8360binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8361massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8362requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8363will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8364
c0065db7 8365@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8366@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8367@item adding additional names
8368Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8369A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8370exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8371when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8372import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8373
c0065db7 8374@example
dc8465bf
NC
8375LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8376
8377EXPORTS
c0065db7 8378foo
dc8465bf 8379_foo = foo
c0065db7 8380@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8381
8382The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8383
8384Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8385source code using the "weak" attribute:
8386
c0065db7
RM
8387@example
8388void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8389void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8390@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8391
8392See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8393symbols.
8394
8395@item renaming symbols
8396Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8397kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8398@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8399DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8400created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8401
c0065db7 8402@example
dc8465bf
NC
8403LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8404
8405EXPORTS
8406_foo = foo
c0065db7 8407@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8408
8409The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8410@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8411@end table
dc8465bf 8412
0a5d968e 8413Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8414unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8415If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8416@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8417that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8418@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8419renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8420to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8421the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8422In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8423which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8424
8425@cindex weak externals
8426@item weak externals
8427The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8428weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8429defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8430are three variants of weak externals:
8431@itemize
8432@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8433called lazy externals.
8434@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8435This form is not presently implemented.
8436@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8437implemented.
8438@end itemize
8439As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8440are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8441uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8442
8443@cindex aligned common symbols
8444@item aligned common symbols
8445As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8446desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8447the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8448carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8449by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8450tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8451but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8452warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8453
2ca22b03
NC
8454@end table
8455
8456@ifclear GENERIC
8457@lowersections
8458@end ifclear
8459@end ifset
8460
e0001a05
NC
8461@ifset XTENSA
8462@ifclear GENERIC
8463@raisesections
8464@end ifclear
8465
8466@node Xtensa
8467@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8468
8469@cindex Xtensa processors
8470The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8471@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8472specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8473keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8474example, with the command:
8475
8476@smallexample
8477SECTIONS
8478@{
8479 .text : @{
8480 *(.literal .text)
8481 @}
8482@}
8483@end smallexample
8484
8485@noindent
8486@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8487and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8488literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8489interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8490group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8491files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8492and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8493
43cd72b9 8494@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8495@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8496Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8497provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8498is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8499literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8500will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8501location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8502the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8503unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8504@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8505range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8506
8507For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8508to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8509instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8510instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8511instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8512@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8513hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8514By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8515switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8516density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8517instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8518performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8519linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8520a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8521
8522The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8523control the linker:
8524
8525@cindex Xtensa options
8526@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8527@item --size-opt
8528When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8529more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8530no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8531alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8532preserve the correctness of the code.
8533@end table
e0001a05
NC
8534
8535@ifclear GENERIC
8536@lowersections
8537@end ifclear
8538@end ifset
8539
252b5132
RH
8540@ifclear SingleFormat
8541@node BFD
8542@chapter BFD
8543
8544@cindex back end
8545@cindex object file management
8546@cindex object formats available
8547@kindex objdump -i
8548The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8549These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8550object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8551format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8552it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8553associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8554object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8555(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8556list all the formats available for your configuration.
8557
8558@cindex BFD requirements
8559@cindex requirements for BFD
8560As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8561several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8562BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8563formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8564been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8565BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8566may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8567
8568One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8569mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8570useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8571conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8572
8573@menu
8574* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8575@end menu
8576
8577@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8578@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8579@cindex opening object files
8580@include bfdsumm.texi
8581@end ifclear
8582
8583@node Reporting Bugs
8584@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8585@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8586@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8587
ff5dcc92 8588Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8589
8590Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8591it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8592to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8593work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8594@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8595
8596In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8597information that enables us to fix the bug.
8598
8599@menu
8600* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8601* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8602@end menu
8603
8604@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8605@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8606@cindex bug criteria
8607
8608If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8609
8610@itemize @bullet
8611@cindex fatal signal
8612@cindex linker crash
8613@cindex crash of linker
8614@item
8615If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8616@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8617
8618@cindex error on valid input
8619@item
ff5dcc92 8620If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8621
8622@cindex invalid input
8623@item
ff5dcc92 8624If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8625may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8626object files are correct.
8627
8628@item
8629If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8630improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8631@end itemize
8632
8633@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8634@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8635@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8636@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8637
8638A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8639products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8640recommend you contact that organization first.
8641
8642You can find contact information for many support companies and
8643individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8644distribution.
8645
ad22bfe8 8646@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8647Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8648@value{BUGURL}.
8649@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8650
8651The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8652@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8653fact or leave it out, state it!
8654
8655Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8656problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8657assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8658matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8659the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8660location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8661were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8662into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8663specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8664and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8665
8666Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8667the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8668on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8669
8670Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8671bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8672respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8673You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8674
8675To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8676
8677@itemize @bullet
8678@item
ff5dcc92 8679The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8680the @samp{--version} argument.
8681
8682Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8683the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8684
8685@item
ff5dcc92 8686Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8687patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8688
8689@item
8690The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8691version number.
8692
8693@item
ff5dcc92 8694What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8695``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8696
8697@item
8698The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8699observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8700list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8701sufficient.
8702
8703If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8704and then we might not encounter the bug.
8705
8706@item
8707A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8708bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8709provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8710bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8711state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8712requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8713we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8714attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8715
8716If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8717@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8718object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8719@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8720how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8721
8722@item
8723A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8724incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8725
ff5dcc92 8726Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8727will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8728not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8729a chance to make a mistake.
8730
8731Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8732say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8733copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8734C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8735and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8736fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8737you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8738any conclusion from our observations.
8739
8740@item
ff5dcc92 8741If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8742diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8743@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8744If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8745context, not by line number.
8746
8747The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8748sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8749@end itemize
8750
8751Here are some things that are not necessary:
8752
8753@itemize @bullet
8754@item
8755A description of the envelope of the bug.
8756
8757Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8758which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8759changes will not affect it.
8760
8761This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8762will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8763with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8764We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8765
8766Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8767of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8768output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8769less time, and so on.
8770
8771However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8772report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8773
8774@item
8775A patch for the bug.
8776
8777A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8778the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8779a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8780to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8781
ff5dcc92 8782Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8783construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8784through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8785able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8786fixed.
8787
8788And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8789patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8790help us to understand.
8791
8792@item
8793A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8794
8795Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8796things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8797@end itemize
8798
8799@node MRI
8800@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8801@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8802To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8803linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8804alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8805described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8806simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8807@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8808linker commands; these commands are described here.
8809
8810In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8811file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8812features to make use of them.
8813
8814You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8815@samp{-c} command-line option.
8816
8817Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8818command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8819blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8820MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8821issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8822
8823Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8824
8825You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8826lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8827The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8828
8829@table @code
8830@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8831@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8832@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8833Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8834the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8835@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8836your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8837script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8838commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8839input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8840@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8841
8842@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8843@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8844Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8845in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8846
8847@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8848
8849@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8850@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8851Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8852@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8853
8854@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8855@item BASE @var{expression}
8856Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8857absolute addresses) in the output file.
8858
8859@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8860@item CHIP @var{expression}
8861@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8862This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8863
8864@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8865@item END
8866This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8867
8868@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8869@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8870Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8871language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8872
8873@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8874@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8875Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8876@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8877
8878The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8879same line, with no change in its effect.
8880
8881@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8882@item LOAD @var{filename}
8883@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8884Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8885same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8886command line.
8887
8888@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8889@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8890@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8891MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8892option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8893
8894@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8895@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8896@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8897Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8898order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8899script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8900sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8901file, in the order specified.
8902
8903@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8904@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8905@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8906@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8907Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8908@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8909
8910@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8911@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8912@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8913@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8914You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8915specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8916If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8917@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8918@end table
8919
793c5807
NC
8920@node GNU Free Documentation License
8921@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8922@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8923
370b66a1
CD
8924@node LD Index
8925@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8926
8927@printindex cp
8928
8929@tex
7ca01ed9 8930% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8931% meantime:
8932\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8933\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8934\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8935\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8936\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8937\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8938\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8939\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8940\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8941% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8942@end tex
8943
252b5132 8944@bye
This page took 1.575701 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.